Mercurial > vim
annotate runtime/doc/options.txt @ 2873:eeb1ac4f66d1 v7.3.210
updated for version 7.3.210
Problem: Can't always find the file when using cscope.
Solution: Add the 'cscoperelative' option. (Raghavendra D Prabhu)
author | Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org> |
---|---|
date | Sun, 12 Jun 2011 20:42:22 +0200 |
parents | c869ff170ddc |
children | fd09a9c8468e |
rev | line source |
---|---|
2833 | 1 *options.txt* For Vim version 7.3. Last change: 2011 May 17 |
7 | 2 |
3 | |
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar | |
5 | |
6 | |
7 Options *options* | |
8 | |
9 1. Setting options |set-option| | |
10 2. Automatically setting options |auto-setting| | |
11 3. Options summary |option-summary| | |
12 | |
13 For an overview of options see help.txt |option-list|. | |
14 | |
15 Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to | |
16 achieve special effects. These options come in three forms: | |
17 boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle* | |
18 number has a numeric value | |
19 string has a string value | |
20 | |
21 ============================================================================== | |
523 | 22 1. Setting options *set-option* *E764* |
7 | 23 |
24 *:se* *:set* | |
25 :se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value. | |
26 | |
27 :se[t] all Show all but terminal options. | |
28 | |
29 :se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the | |
30 key codes are not shown, because they are generated | |
31 internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal | |
32 codes in the GUI is not useful either... | |
33 | |
34 *E518* *E519* | |
35 :se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}. | |
36 | |
37 :se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on. | |
38 Number option: show value. | |
39 String option: show value. | |
40 | |
41 :se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off. | |
42 | |
2152 | 43 *:set-!* *:set-inv* |
7 | 44 :se[t] {option}! or |
45 :se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi} | |
46 | |
47 *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim* | |
48 :se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the | |
49 current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi} | |
50 :se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi} | |
51 :se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi} | |
52 | |
53 :se[t] all& Set all options, except terminal options, to their | |
10 | 54 default value. The values of 'term', 'lines' and |
7 | 55 'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi} |
56 | |
57 *:set-args* *E487* *E521* | |
58 :se[t] {option}={value} or | |
59 :se[t] {option}:{value} | |
60 Set string or number option to {value}. | |
61 For numeric options the value can be given in decimal, | |
62 hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0') | |
63 (hex and octal are only available for machines which | |
64 have the strtol() function). | |
65 The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by | |
66 default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is | |
67 set). See |cmdline-completion|. | |
68 White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and | |
69 will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value} | |
70 is not allowed. | |
71 See |option-backslash| for using white space and | |
72 backslashes in {value}. | |
73 | |
74 :se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=* | |
75 Add the {value} to a number option, or append the | |
76 {value} to a string option. When the option is a | |
77 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the | |
78 value was empty. | |
79 If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags | |
557 | 80 are removed. When adding a flag that was already |
81 present the option value doesn't change. | |
809 | 82 Also see |:set-args| above. |
7 | 83 {not in Vi} |
84 | |
85 :se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=* | |
86 Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend | |
87 the {value} to a string option. When the option is a | |
88 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the | |
89 value was empty. | |
90 Also see |:set-args| above. | |
91 {not in Vi} | |
92 | |
93 :se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=* | |
94 Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove | |
95 the {value} from a string option, if it is there. | |
96 If the {value} is not found in a string option, there | |
97 is no error or warning. When the option is a comma | |
98 separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option | |
99 becomes empty. | |
100 When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be | |
101 exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags | |
102 one by one to avoid problems. | |
103 Also see |:set-args| above. | |
104 {not in Vi} | |
105 | |
106 The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: > | |
107 :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3 | |
108 If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given | |
109 and the following arguments will be ignored. | |
110 | |
111 *:set-verbose* | |
112 When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it | |
113 was last set. Example: > | |
114 :verbose set shiftwidth cindent? | |
1621 | 115 < shiftwidth=4 ~ |
116 Last set from modeline ~ | |
117 cindent ~ | |
118 Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim ~ | |
119 This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":verbose | |
120 set all" or ":verbose set" without an argument. | |
121 When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. | |
7 | 122 When the option was set while executing a function, user command or |
123 autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported. | |
124 Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting | |
125 'compatible'. | |
1621 | 126 A few special texts: |
127 Last set from modeline ~ | |
128 Option was set in a |modeline|. | |
129 Last set from --cmd argument ~ | |
130 Option was set with command line argument |--cmd| or +. | |
131 Last set from -c argument ~ | |
132 Option was set with command line argument |-c|, +, |-S| or | |
133 |-q|. | |
134 Last set from environment variable ~ | |
135 Option was set from an environment variable, $VIMINIT, | |
136 $GVIMINIT or $EXINIT. | |
137 Last set from error handler ~ | |
138 Option was cleared when evaluating it resulted in an error. | |
139 | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
140 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature} |
7 | 141 |
142 *:set-termcap* *E522* | |
667 | 143 For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a terminal option. This will |
7 | 144 override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If |
145 the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: > | |
146 :set <t_#4>=^[Ot | |
147 This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For | |
148 example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: > | |
149 :set <M-b>=^[b | |
150 (the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it) | |
151 The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations. | |
152 | |
2726 | 153 You can define any key codes, e.g.: > |
154 :set t_xy=^[foo; | |
155 There is no warning for using a name that isn't recognized. You can map these | |
156 codes as you like: > | |
157 :map <t_xy> something | |
158 < *E846* | |
159 When a key code is not set, it's like it does not exist. Trying to get its | |
160 value will result in an error: > | |
161 :set t_kb= | |
162 :set t_kb | |
163 E846: Key code not set: t_kb | |
164 | |
36 | 165 The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
166 security reasons. | |
167 | |
7 | 168 The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put |
10 | 169 at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of |
7 | 170 "set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the |
171 |more-prompt|. | |
172 | |
173 *option-backslash* | |
174 To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a | |
175 backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this | |
176 means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded | |
177 down). | |
178 A few examples: > | |
179 :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags" | |
180 :set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file" | |
181 :set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file" | |
182 | |
10 | 183 The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To |
184 include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the | |
7 | 185 'titlestring' option to "hi|there": > |
186 :set titlestring=hi\|there | |
187 This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": > | |
188 :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there | |
189 | |
642 | 190 Similarly, the double quote character starts a comment. To include the '"' in |
191 the option value, use '\"' instead. This example sets the 'titlestring' | |
192 option to 'hi "there"': > | |
193 :set titlestring=hi\ \"there\" | |
194 | |
10 | 195 For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More |
7 | 196 precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment |
197 variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not | |
198 removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma, | |
199 etc.) is used like explained above. | |
200 There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": > | |
201 :set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path" | |
202 :set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path" | |
203 :set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!) | |
204 For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes | |
205 are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be | |
10 | 206 halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a |
7 | 207 result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it. |
208 | |
209 *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags* | |
210 *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552* | |
211 Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an | |
212 option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: > | |
213 :set guioptions+=a | |
214 Remove a flag from an option like this: > | |
215 :set guioptions-=a | |
216 This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'. | |
10 | 217 Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has |
7 | 218 the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba" |
219 doesn't appear. | |
220 | |
221 *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var* | |
22 | 222 Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded. If the |
7 | 223 environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable |
224 name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name | |
225 are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may | |
226 follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is | |
227 appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: > | |
228 :set term=$TERM.new | |
229 :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,. | |
230 When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set | |
231 opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing. | |
232 | |
233 | |
234 Handling of local options *local-options* | |
235 | |
236 Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer | |
237 has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value. This | |
238 allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set | |
239 'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another. | |
240 | |
241 The following explains what happens to these local options in specific | |
242 situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses | |
243 the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user | |
244 expects is a bit complicated... | |
245 | |
246 When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus | |
247 right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same. | |
248 | |
249 When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since | |
250 the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer, | |
251 these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a | |
252 global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and | |
253 global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed, | |
254 thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer. | |
255 | |
256 When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window | |
257 options are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this window, the | |
258 values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the window where | |
259 the buffer was edited last are used. | |
260 | |
261 It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer. | |
262 When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep | |
263 using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the | |
264 local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window | |
265 has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but | |
266 global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: > | |
267 :e one | |
268 :set list | |
269 :e two | |
270 Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list" | |
271 command you have also set the global value. > | |
272 :set nolist | |
273 :e one | |
274 :setlocal list | |
275 :e two | |
276 Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global | |
277 value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the | |
278 global value. Note that if you do this next: > | |
279 :e one | |
280 You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited | |
10 | 281 "one". The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer. |
7 | 282 |
283 *:setl* *:setlocal* | |
284 :setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the | |
285 current buffer or window. Not all options have a | |
286 local value. If the option does not have a local | |
287 value the global value is set. | |
2413 | 288 With the "all" argument: display local values for all |
289 local options. | |
290 Without argument: Display local values for all local | |
291 options which are different from the default. | |
7 | 292 When displaying a specific local option, show the |
1621 | 293 local value. For a global/local boolean option, when |
294 the global value is being used, "--" is displayed | |
295 before the option name. | |
296 For a global option the global value is | |
7 | 297 shown (but that might change in the future). |
298 {not in Vi} | |
299 | |
809 | 300 :setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value by |
301 copying the value. | |
302 {not in Vi} | |
303 | |
304 :se[t] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value by | |
305 making it empty. Only makes sense for |global-local| | |
306 options. | |
7 | 307 {not in Vi} |
308 | |
309 *:setg* *:setglobal* | |
310 :setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local | |
311 option without changing the local value. | |
312 When displaying an option, the global value is shown. | |
2413 | 313 With the "all" argument: display global values for all |
314 local options. | |
315 Without argument: display global values for all local | |
316 options which are different from the default. | |
7 | 317 {not in Vi} |
318 | |
319 For buffer-local and window-local options: | |
320 Command global value local value ~ | |
321 :set option=value set set | |
322 :setlocal option=value - set | |
323 :setglobal option=value set - | |
324 :set option? - display | |
325 :setlocal option? - display | |
326 :setglobal option? display - | |
327 | |
328 | |
329 Global options with a local value *global-local* | |
330 | |
40 | 331 Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows. |
332 For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value. | |
333 You can set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer or window will then | |
334 use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global | |
335 value. | |
7 | 336 |
337 For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global | |
338 'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: > | |
339 :set makeprg=gmake | |
340 then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set | |
341 the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too. | |
342 However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use | |
1152 | 343 another 'makeprg' for it, without changing the value used for the C source |
10 | 344 files. You use this command: > |
7 | 345 :setlocal makeprg=perlmake |
346 You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: > | |
347 :setlocal makeprg= | |
348 This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the | |
349 "<" flag, like this: > | |
350 :setlocal autoread< | |
351 Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the | |
352 local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters | |
809 | 353 when the global value changes later). You can also use: > |
354 :set path< | |
355 This will make the local value of 'path' empty, so that the global value is | |
356 used. Thus it does the same as: > | |
357 :setlocal path= | |
7 | 358 Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using |
359 ":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then. | |
360 | |
361 | |
362 Setting the filetype | |
363 | |
364 :setf[iletype] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype* | |
365 Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if | |
366 not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands. | |
367 This is short for: > | |
368 :if !did_filetype() | |
369 : setlocal filetype={filetype} | |
370 :endif | |
371 < This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid | |
372 setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different | |
373 settings and syntax files to be loaded. | |
374 {not in Vi} | |
375 | |
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
376 *option-window* *optwin* |
7 | 377 :bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options* |
378 :opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options. | |
379 Options are grouped by function. | |
380 Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the | |
381 short help to open a help window with more help for | |
382 the option. | |
383 Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the | |
384 "set" line to set the new value. For window and | |
385 buffer specific options, the last accessed window is | |
386 used to set the option value in, unless this is a help | |
387 window, in which case the window below help window is | |
388 used (skipping the option-window). | |
389 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| or | |
390 |+autocmd| features} | |
391 | |
392 *$HOME* | |
393 Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an | |
394 option and after a space or comma. | |
395 | |
396 On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory | |
397 of user "user". Example: > | |
398 :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,. | |
399 | |
400 On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can | |
401 contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the | |
402 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'. | |
403 | |
404 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set" | |
405 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let". | |
406 | |
407 | |
408 Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on | |
409 the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. | |
410 | |
411 *:fix* *:fixdel* | |
412 :fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD': | |
413 't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~ | |
414 CTRL-? CTRL-H | |
415 not CTRL-? CTRL-? | |
416 | |
417 (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi} | |
418 | |
419 If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the | |
420 code for backspace is alright, you can put this in | |
421 your .vimrc: > | |
422 :fixdel | |
423 < This works no matter what the actual code for | |
424 backspace is. | |
425 | |
426 If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can | |
427 use this: > | |
428 :if &term == "termname" | |
429 : set t_kb=^V<BS> | |
430 : fixdel | |
431 :endif | |
432 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key | |
10 | 433 (don't type four characters!). Replace "termname" |
7 | 434 with your terminal name. |
435 | |
436 If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not | |
437 CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: > | |
438 :if &term == "termname" | |
439 : set t_kD=^V<Delete> | |
440 :endif | |
441 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key | |
442 (don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname" | |
443 with your terminal name. | |
444 | |
445 *Linux-backspace* | |
446 Note about Linux: By default the backspace key | |
447 produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by | |
448 putting this line in your rc.local: > | |
449 echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys | |
450 < | |
451 *NetBSD-backspace* | |
452 Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce | |
453 the right code, try this: > | |
454 xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace" | |
455 < If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: > | |
456 keysym 22 = BackSpace | |
457 < You need to restart for this to take effect. | |
458 | |
459 ============================================================================== | |
460 2. Automatically setting options *auto-setting* | |
461 | |
462 Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives | |
463 to set options automatically for one or more files: | |
464 | |
465 1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See | |
466 |initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions, | |
467 and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started. | |
468 You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and | |
469 |:mksession|. | |
470 2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed. | |
471 This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and | |
472 many other things. See |autocommand|. | |
473 3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a | |
474 number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for | |
475 modelines. This is explained here. | |
476 | |
477 *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520* | |
478 There are two forms of modelines. The first form: | |
479 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options} | |
480 | |
481 [text] any text or empty | |
482 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) | |
483 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:" | |
484 [white] optional white space | |
485 {options} a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':', | |
486 where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set" | |
1152 | 487 command (can be empty) |
7 | 488 |
782 | 489 Example: |
490 vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6 ~ | |
7 | 491 |
492 The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi): | |
493 | |
494 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text] | |
495 | |
496 [text] any text or empty | |
497 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) | |
498 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:" | |
499 [white] optional white space | |
500 se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space) | |
501 {options} a list of options, separated with white space, which is the | |
502 argument for a ":set" command | |
503 : a colon | |
504 [text] any text or empty | |
505 | |
782 | 506 Example: |
507 /* vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~ | |
7 | 508 |
509 The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the chance | |
510 that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: "vi:" and | |
511 "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version | |
512 3.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be | |
513 short for "example:"). | |
514 | |
515 *modeline-local* | |
516 The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the | |
11 | 517 buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global |
518 options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and | |
519 the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result | |
520 depends on which one was opened last. | |
7 | 521 |
23 | 522 When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options |
523 from the modeline are used. Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local | |
524 option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer | |
525 in another window. But window-local options will be set. | |
526 | |
7 | 527 *modeline-version* |
528 If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version | |
529 number can be specified where "vim:" is used: | |
530 vim{vers}: version {vers} or later | |
531 vim<{vers}: version before {vers} | |
532 vim={vers}: version {vers} | |
533 vim>{vers}: version after {vers} | |
534 {vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor). | |
782 | 535 For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later: |
536 /* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */ ~ | |
537 To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7: | |
538 /* vim<570: set sw=4: */ ~ | |
7 | 539 There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":". |
540 | |
541 | |
542 The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option. | |
543 If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked. | |
544 | |
545 Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line | |
782 | 546 like: |
547 /* vi:ts=4: */ ~ | |
548 will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: | |
549 /* vi:set ts=4: */ ~ | |
7 | 550 |
551 If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped. | |
552 | |
553 If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The | |
782 | 554 backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: |
555 /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */ ~ | |
7 | 556 This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the |
557 ':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:". | |
558 | |
559 No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody | |
1111 | 560 might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines). And not all options |
561 can be set. For some options a flag is set, so that when it's used the | |
1152 | 562 |sandbox| is effective. Still, there is always a small risk that a modeline |
1111 | 563 causes trouble. E.g., when some joker sets 'textwidth' to 5 all your lines |
564 are wrapped unexpectedly. So disable modelines before editing untrusted text. | |
565 The mail ftplugin does this, for example. | |
7 | 566 |
567 Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could | |
568 define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For | |
569 example: > | |
570 au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif | |
571 And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing | |
572 "VAR". | |
573 | |
574 ============================================================================== | |
575 3. Options summary *option-summary* | |
576 | |
577 In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with | |
578 an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used. | |
579 | |
580 In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option" | |
581 is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used. | |
582 | |
583 For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is | |
584 used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when | |
585 'compatible' is set. | |
586 | |
587 Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that | |
10 | 588 are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a |
7 | 589 different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in |
590 one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view | |
591 at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain | |
592 file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example | |
593 the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C | |
594 program. | |
595 | |
596 global one option for all buffers and windows | |
597 local to window each window has its own copy of this option | |
598 local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option | |
599 | |
600 When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window | |
601 are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the | |
602 buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the | |
603 'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for | |
604 buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is | |
10 | 605 first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer |
606 is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not | |
7 | 607 present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the |
608 buffer is created. | |
609 | |
519 | 610 Hidden options *hidden-options* |
611 | |
612 Not all options are supported in all versions. This depends on the supported | |
613 features and sometimes on the system. A remark about this is in curly braces | |
614 below. When an option is not supported it may still be set without getting an | |
615 error, this is called a hidden option. You can't get the value of a hidden | |
616 option though, it is not stored. | |
617 | |
618 To test if option "foo" can be used with ":set" use something like this: > | |
619 if exists('&foo') | |
620 This also returns true for a hidden option. To test if option "foo" is really | |
621 supported use something like this: > | |
622 if exists('+foo') | |
623 < | |
7 | 624 *E355* |
625 A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. | |
626 | |
627 *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph* | |
628 'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise) | |
629 global | |
630 {not in Vi} | |
631 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
632 feature} | |
633 The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The | |
634 routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode | |
635 (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_) | |
636 outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26]. | |
637 aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8. | |
638 See |rileft.txt|. | |
639 | |
640 *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'* | |
641 'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off) | |
642 global | |
643 {not in Vi} | |
644 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
645 feature} | |
646 Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to | |
647 avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get | |
648 into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See | |
649 'revins'. | |
650 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
651 | |
652 *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'* | |
653 'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off) | |
654 global | |
655 {not in Vi} | |
656 {only available when compiled with the |+farsi| | |
657 feature} | |
233 | 658 When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles |
7 | 659 the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set. |
660 | |
233 | 661 When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This |
7 | 662 is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right |
663 mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left | |
10 | 664 mode). See |farsi.txt|. |
7 | 665 |
666 *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'* | |
667 'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single") | |
668 global | |
669 {not in Vi} | |
670 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
671 feature} | |
672 Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding. | |
673 Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class | |
674 Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek | |
675 letters, Cyrillic letters). | |
676 | |
677 There are currently two possible values: | |
233 | 678 "single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is |
7 | 679 expected by most users. |
680 "double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters. | |
2492
c945fdb34ce3
Disallow setting 'ambiwidth' to "double" when 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
681 *E834* *E835* |
c945fdb34ce3
Disallow setting 'ambiwidth' to "double" when 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
682 The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars' |
c945fdb34ce3
Disallow setting 'ambiwidth' to "double" when 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
683 contains a character that would be double width. |
7 | 684 |
685 There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for | |
686 those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in | |
687 legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro, | |
688 Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets, | |
233 | 689 therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also |
7 | 690 true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text |
233 | 691 file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or |
7 | 692 Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font |
693 (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.), | |
694 this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived | |
695 by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has | |
696 to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP | |
697 when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode | |
698 Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11). | |
699 | |
700 *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'* | |
701 'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off) | |
702 global | |
703 {not in Vi} | |
704 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled | |
705 on Mac OS X} | |
706 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X | |
707 v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts, | |
708 which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays. | |
709 Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set | |
710 to its default (empty string). | |
711 | |
712 *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'* | |
713 'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off) | |
714 global | |
715 {not in Vi} | |
2152 | 716 {only available when compiled with it, use |
717 exists("+autochdir") to check} | |
438 | 718 When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you |
719 open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window. | |
720 It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened | |
721 or selected. | |
722 This option is provided for backward compatibility with the Vim | |
723 released with Sun ONE Studio 4 Enterprise Edition. | |
819 | 724 Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work. |
7 | 725 |
726 *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'* | |
727 'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off) | |
728 local to window | |
729 {not in Vi} | |
730 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
731 feature} | |
732 This option can be set to start editing Arabic text. | |
733 Setting this option will: | |
734 - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. | |
735 - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. | |
736 - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles | |
737 between typing English and Arabic key mapping. | |
738 - Set the 'delcombine' option | |
739 Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text. | |
740 | |
741 Resetting this option will: | |
742 - Reset the 'rightleft' option. | |
743 - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value). | |
744 Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global | |
745 option. | |
746 Also see |arabic.txt|. | |
747 | |
748 *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'* | |
749 *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'* | |
750 'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on) | |
751 global | |
752 {not in Vi} | |
753 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
754 feature} | |
755 When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character | |
756 corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language | |
757 take affect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad | |
758 one which encompasses: | |
759 a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location | |
760 within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone). | |
761 b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters | |
762 c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
763 When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
764 form. |
7 | 765 Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for |
766 further details see |arabic.txt|. | |
767 | |
768 *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'* | |
769 'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off) | |
770 local to buffer | |
771 Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR> | |
772 in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not | |
773 type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type | |
1152 | 774 <Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor |
775 to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included | |
776 in 'cpoptions'. | |
10 | 777 When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you |
778 reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first | |
779 line. | |
7 | 780 When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in |
781 a different way. | |
782 The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set. | |
783 {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing | |
784 <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the | |
785 deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}. | |
786 | |
787 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'* | |
788 'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off) | |
789 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
790 {not in Vi} | |
791 When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and | |
792 it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again. | |
793 When the file has been deleted this is not done. |timestamp| | |
794 If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to | |
795 using the global value: > | |
796 :set autoread< | |
797 < | |
798 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'* | |
799 'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off) | |
800 global | |
801 Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each | |
802 :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!, | |
864 | 803 :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a :buffer, CTRL-O, CTRL-I, |
7 | 804 '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file. |
805 Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see | |
806 'autowriteall' for that. | |
807 | |
808 *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'* | |
809 'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off) | |
810 global | |
811 {not in Vi} | |
812 Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit", | |
813 ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window. | |
814 Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has | |
815 been set. | |
816 | |
817 *'background'* *'bg'* | |
2826 | 818 'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light", see below) |
7 | 819 global |
820 {not in Vi} | |
821 When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a | |
822 dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that | |
823 look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal. | |
824 Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used. | |
825 This will not always be correct. | |
826 Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim | |
827 what the background color looks like. For changing the background | |
828 color, see |:hi-normal|. | |
829 | |
830 When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for | |
10 | 831 the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not |
1621 | 832 change. *g:colors_name* |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
833 When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set) |
7 | 834 setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If |
835 the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work. | |
836 However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
837 be undone. First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed. |
7 | 838 |
839 When setting 'background' to the default value with: > | |
840 :set background& | |
841 < Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly, | |
842 in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value. | |
843 | |
844 When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be | |
845 "light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects | |
846 that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to | |
847 "dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read | |
848 (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background | |
849 color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by | |
850 putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value | |
851 of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on"). | |
2826 | 852 |
853 For MS-DOS, Windows and OS/2 the default is "dark". | |
854 For other systems "dark" is used when 'term' is "linux", | |
855 "screen.linux", "cygwin" or "putty", or $COLORFGBG suggests a dark | |
856 background. Otherwise the default is "light". | |
857 | |
7 | 858 Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly |
859 depending on the terminal name. Example: > | |
860 :if &term == "pcterm" | |
861 : set background=dark | |
862 :endif | |
863 < When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups | |
864 will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER | |
865 the setting of the 'background' option. | |
866 This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file | |
867 to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this | |
868 option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be | |
869 done with ":syntax on". | |
870 | |
871 *'backspace'* *'bs'* | |
872 'backspace' 'bs' string (default "") | |
873 global | |
874 {not in Vi} | |
875 Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert | |
876 mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows | |
877 a way to backspace over something: | |
878 value effect ~ | |
879 indent allow backspacing over autoindent | |
880 eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines) | |
881 start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U | |
882 stop once at the start of insert. | |
883 | |
884 When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used. | |
885 | |
886 For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier: | |
887 value effect ~ | |
888 0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible) | |
889 1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol" | |
890 2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start" | |
891 | |
892 See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want. | |
893 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. | |
894 | |
895 *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'* | |
896 'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off) | |
897 global | |
898 {not in Vi} | |
899 Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the | |
900 file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the | |
901 backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being | |
902 written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is | |
903 the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both | |
10 | 904 options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the |
7 | 905 |backup-table| for more explanations. |
906 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. | |
907 When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the | |
908 oldest version of a file. | |
909 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
910 | |
911 *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'* | |
912 'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto") | |
913 global | |
914 {not in Vi} | |
915 When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's | |
916 done. This is a comma separated list of words. | |
917 | |
918 The main values are: | |
919 "yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one | |
920 "no" rename the file and write a new one | |
921 "auto" one of the previous, what works best | |
922 | |
923 Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are: | |
924 "breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing | |
925 "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing | |
926 | |
927 Making a copy and overwriting the original file: | |
928 - Takes extra time to copy the file. | |
929 + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or | |
930 has a resource fork, all this is preserved. | |
931 - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link, | |
932 not of the real file. | |
933 | |
934 Renaming the file and writing a new one: | |
935 + It's fast. | |
936 - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new | |
937 file. | |
938 - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link. | |
939 | |
940 The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file | |
941 is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and | |
1152 | 942 the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected, a |
943 copy will be made. | |
7 | 944 |
945 The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in | |
946 combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they | |
947 force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing | |
948 exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to | |
949 become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be | |
950 useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or | |
951 hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not | |
952 be propagated back to the original source. | |
953 *crontab* | |
954 One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program | |
955 that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if | |
956 the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the | |
10 | 957 backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an |
7 | 958 example. |
959 | |
960 When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled | |
961 with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and | |
962 symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file | |
10 | 963 however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The |
7 | 964 group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this |
965 fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for | |
966 others. | |
967 | |
968 When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has | |
969 the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file | |
970 is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic) | |
971 link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't | |
972 rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly | |
973 written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but | |
974 the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will | |
975 again not rename the file. | |
976 | |
977 *'backupdir'* *'bdir'* | |
978 'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", | |
979 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:/tmp,c:/temp" | |
980 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/") | |
981 global | |
982 {not in Vi} | |
983 List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas. | |
984 - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
985 where this is possible. The directory must exist, Vim will not |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
986 create it for you. |
7 | 987 - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is |
988 impossible!). Writing may fail because of this. | |
989 - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory | |
990 as the edited file. | |
33 | 991 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to |
7 | 992 put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The |
993 leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. | |
994 ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning). | |
995 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part | |
996 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory | |
997 name, precede it with a backslash. | |
998 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. | |
999 - A directory name may end in an '/'. | |
1000 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
1001 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to | |
1002 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > | |
1003 :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces | |
1004 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start | |
1005 of the option is removed. | |
1006 See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options. | |
1007 If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: > | |
1008 :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp | |
1009 < You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your | |
1010 home directory for this to work properly. | |
1011 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
1012 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
1013 uses another default. | |
1014 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1015 security reasons. | |
1016 | |
1017 *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589* | |
1018 'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_") | |
1019 global | |
1020 {not in Vi} | |
1021 String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the | |
1022 backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids | |
1023 accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might | |
1024 prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with | |
1025 ".bak" that you want to keep. | |
36 | 1026 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 1027 |
26 | 1028 If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre |
1029 autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to | |
1030 include a timestamp. > | |
1031 :au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~' | |
1032 < Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory. | |
1033 | |
7 | 1034 *'backupskip'* *'bsk'* |
1035 'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*") | |
1036 global | |
1037 {not in Vi} | |
1038 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
1039 feature} | |
1040 A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the | |
1041 name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both | |
1042 the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used. | |
1043 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. | |
1044 Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|. | |
1045 When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the | |
233 | 1046 default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix. |
1152 | 1047 |
1048 Note that environment variables are not expanded. If you want to use | |
1049 $HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: > | |
1050 :let backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*' | |
1051 | |
1052 < Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a | |
557 | 1053 backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see |
1054 the newly created file). Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|. | |
7 | 1055 |
1056 *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'* | |
1057 'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600) | |
1058 global | |
1059 {not in Vi} | |
1060 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
1061 feature} | |
1062 Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|. | |
1063 | |
1064 *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'* | |
1065 'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off) | |
1066 global | |
1067 {not in Vi} | |
1068 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
189 | 1069 feature} |
7 | 1070 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality. |
1071 | |
189 | 1072 *'balloonexpr'* *'bexpr'* |
1073 'balloonexpr' 'bexpr' string (default "") | |
790 | 1074 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
189 | 1075 {not in Vi} |
1076 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
1077 feature} | |
782 | 1078 Expression for text to show in evaluation balloon. It is only used |
1079 when 'ballooneval' is on. These variables can be used: | |
189 | 1080 |
1081 v:beval_bufnr number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show | |
1082 v:beval_winnr number of the window | |
1083 v:beval_lnum line number | |
1084 v:beval_col column number (byte index) | |
1085 v:beval_text word under or after the mouse pointer | |
1086 | |
1087 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! | |
1088 Example: > | |
1089 function! MyBalloonExpr() | |
435 | 1090 return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum . |
189 | 1091 \', column ' . v:beval_col . |
1092 \ ' of file ' . bufname(v:beval_bufnr) . | |
1093 \ ' on word "' . v:beval_text . '"' | |
1094 endfunction | |
1095 set bexpr=MyBalloonExpr() | |
1096 set ballooneval | |
1097 < | |
1098 NOTE: The balloon is displayed only if the cursor is on a text | |
1099 character. If the result of evaluating 'balloonexpr' is not empty, | |
1100 Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans | |
1101 or Sun Workshop). | |
1102 | |
634 | 1103 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
1104 |sandbox-option|. | |
1105 | |
1106 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
1107 evaluating 'balloonexpr' |textlock|. | |
1108 | |
446 | 1109 To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check: > |
435 | 1110 if has("balloon_multiline") |
714 | 1111 < When they are supported "\n" characters will start a new line. If the |
1112 expression evaluates to a |List| this is equal to using each List item | |
1113 as a string and putting "\n" in between them. | |
1114 | |
7 | 1115 *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'* |
1116 'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off) | |
1117 local to buffer | |
1118 {not in Vi} | |
1119 This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also | |
1120 use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few | |
1121 options will be changed (also when it already was on): | |
1122 'textwidth' will be set to 0 | |
1123 'wrapmargin' will be set to 0 | |
1124 'modeline' will be off | |
1125 'expandtab' will be off | |
1126 Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the | |
1127 file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL> | |
1128 separates lines). | |
1129 The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the | |
1130 file is read without conversion. | |
1131 NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is | |
1132 on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g., | |
1133 'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set | |
1134 'bin' again when the file has been loaded. | |
1135 The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when | |
1136 'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of | |
1137 saved option values. | |
1138 To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument. | |
1139 This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all | |
1140 files you edit. | |
1141 When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if | |
1142 there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to | |
1143 the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See | |
1144 the 'endofline' option. | |
1145 | |
1146 *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'* | |
1147 'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on) | |
1148 global | |
1149 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} | |
446 | 1150 When on the BIOS is called to obtain a keyboard character. This works |
7 | 1151 better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console. When using a |
1152 terminal over a serial port reset this option. | |
1153 Also see |'conskey'|. | |
1154 | |
1155 *'bomb'* *'nobomb'* | |
1156 'bomb' boolean (default off) | |
1157 local to buffer | |
1158 {not in Vi} | |
1159 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
1160 feature} | |
1161 When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte | |
1162 Order Mark) is prepended to the file: | |
1163 - this option is on | |
1164 - the 'binary' option is off | |
1165 - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big | |
1166 endian variants. | |
1167 Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file. | |
1168 Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it | |
1169 causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1170 appear halfway the resulting file. Gcc doesn't accept a BOM. |
7 | 1171 When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a |
1172 check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly. | |
1173 Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you | |
1174 don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM | |
1175 will be restored when writing the file. | |
1176 | |
1177 *'breakat'* *'brk'* | |
1178 'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?") | |
1179 global | |
1180 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1181 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| |
7 | 1182 feature} |
1183 This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line | |
500 | 1184 break if 'linebreak' is on. Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit |
1185 characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding. | |
7 | 1186 |
1187 *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'* | |
29 | 1188 'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default: "last") |
7 | 1189 global |
1621 | 1190 {not in Vi} {only for Motif, Athena, GTK, Mac and |
1191 Win32 GUI} | |
7 | 1192 Which directory to use for the file browser: |
1621 | 1193 last Use same directory as with last file browser, where a |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
1194 file was opened or saved. |
7 | 1195 buffer Use the directory of the related buffer. |
1196 current Use the current directory. | |
1197 {path} Use the specified directory | |
1198 | |
1199 *'bufhidden'* *'bh'* | |
1200 'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "") | |
1201 local to buffer | |
1202 {not in Vi} | |
1203 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
1204 feature} | |
1205 This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer | |
1206 displayed in a window: | |
1207 <empty> follow the global 'hidden' option | |
1208 hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden' | |
1209 is not set | |
1210 unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using | |
1211 |:hide| | |
1212 delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when | |
1213 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using | |
1214 |:bdelete| | |
1215 wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when | |
1216 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using | |
1217 |:bwipeout| | |
1218 | |
82 | 1219 CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer |
1220 are lost without a warning. | |
7 | 1221 This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify |
1222 special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
1223 | |
1224 *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85* | |
1225 'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on) | |
1226 local to buffer | |
1227 {not in Vi} | |
1228 When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If | |
1229 it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc. | |
1230 This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember | |
1231 a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer. | |
1232 But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer". | |
1233 | |
1234 *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382* | |
1235 'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "") | |
1236 local to buffer | |
1237 {not in Vi} | |
1238 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
1239 feature} | |
1240 The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer: | |
1241 <empty> normal buffer | |
1242 nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be | |
1243 written | |
1244 nowrite buffer which will not be written | |
17 | 1245 acwrite buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd |
856 | 1246 autocommands. {not available when compiled without the |
17 | 1247 |+autocmd| feature} |
7 | 1248 quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow| |
648 | 1249 or list of locations |:lwindow| |
7 | 1250 help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this |
1251 manually) | |
1252 | |
1253 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to | |
1254 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
1255 | |
1256 Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects! | |
1257 | |
648 | 1258 A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location |
1259 list. This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and | |
1260 you are not supposed to change it. | |
7 | 1261 |
1262 "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar: | |
1263 both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't | |
1264 work (":w filename" does work though). | |
1265 both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|. | |
1266 There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for | |
1267 example when you quit Vim. | |
1268 both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory | |
1269 (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap | |
1270 file). | |
1271 nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a | |
1272 file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd| | |
1273 command. | |
17 | 1274 *E676* |
1275 "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like | |
1276 "nofile", but it will be written. Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and | |
1277 "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned | |
1278 without saving. For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|, | |
1279 |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands. | |
7 | 1280 |
1281 *'casemap'* *'cmp'* | |
1282 'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii") | |
1283 global | |
1284 {not in Vi} | |
804 | 1285 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
1286 feature} | |
7 | 1287 Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain |
1288 these words, separated by a comma: | |
1289 internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current | |
1290 locale does not change the case mapping. This only | |
493 | 1291 matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding, |
1292 "latin1" or "iso-8859-15". When "internal" is | |
1293 omitted, the towupper() and towlower() system library | |
1294 functions are used when available. | |
7 | 1295 keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US |
1296 case mapping, the current locale is not effective. | |
1297 This probably only matters for Turkish. | |
1298 | |
1299 *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346* | |
1300 'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,") | |
1301 global | |
1302 {not in Vi} | |
1303 {not available when compiled without the | |
1304 |+file_in_path| feature} | |
1305 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the | |
1306 |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched | |
1668 | 1307 for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with "/", "./" |
1308 or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then. | |
7 | 1309 The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as |
1310 |'path'|. Also see |file-searching|. | |
1311 The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look | |
1312 in the current directory first. | |
1313 If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include | |
1314 a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to | |
1315 override it: > | |
1316 :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g') | |
1317 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1318 security reasons. | |
1319 (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names). | |
1320 | |
1321 *'cedit'* | |
1322 'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F) | |
1323 global | |
1324 {not in Vi} | |
1325 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| | |
1326 feature} | |
1327 The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window. | |
1328 The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off. | |
1329 Only non-printable keys are allowed. | |
1330 The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to | |
1331 type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: > | |
1332 :set cedit=<C-Y> | |
1333 :set cedit=<Esc> | |
1334 < |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character. | |
1335 See |cmdwin|. | |
1336 | |
1337 *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513* | |
1338 'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "") | |
1339 global | |
1340 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1341 and |+eval| features} |
7 | 1342 {not in Vi} |
1343 An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is | |
1344 evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a | |
1345 different encoding from what is desired. | |
1346 'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is | |
1347 supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is | |
1348 preferred, because it is much faster. | |
1349 'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no | |
1350 file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first. | |
1351 The expression must return zero or an empty string for success, | |
1352 non-zero for failure. | |
1353 The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'. | |
1354 Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are | |
1355 used. | |
1356 Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8" | |
1357 is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this. | |
1358 'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c' | |
1359 flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion. | |
1360 Example: > | |
1361 set charconvert=CharConvert() | |
1362 fun CharConvert() | |
1363 system("recode " | |
1364 \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to | |
1365 \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out) | |
1366 return v:shell_error | |
1367 endfun | |
1368 < The related Vim variables are: | |
1369 v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding | |
1370 v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding | |
1371 v:fname_in name of the input file | |
1372 v:fname_out name of the output file | |
1373 Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same. | |
1374 Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different | |
1375 from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4. | |
1376 Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want | |
1377 to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care | |
1378 of this. | |
1379 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1380 security reasons. | |
1381 | |
1382 *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'* | |
1383 'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off) | |
1384 local to buffer | |
1385 {not in Vi} | |
1386 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1387 feature} | |
1621 | 1388 Enables automatic C program indenting. See 'cinkeys' to set the keys |
7 | 1389 that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your |
1390 preferred indent style. | |
1391 If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'. | |
1392 If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty, | |
1393 the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an | |
1394 external program. | |
1395 See |C-indenting|. | |
1396 When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent' | |
1397 option or 'indentexpr'. | |
1398 This option is not used when 'paste' is set. | |
1399 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
1400 | |
1401 *'cinkeys'* *'cink'* | |
1402 'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") | |
1403 local to buffer | |
1404 {not in Vi} | |
1405 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1406 feature} | |
1407 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of | |
1408 the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is | |
1409 empty. | |
1410 For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|. | |
1411 See |C-indenting|. | |
1412 | |
1413 *'cinoptions'* *'cino'* | |
1414 'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "") | |
1415 local to buffer | |
1416 {not in Vi} | |
1417 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1418 feature} | |
1419 The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C | |
1420 program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and | |
1421 |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general. | |
1422 | |
1423 | |
1424 *'cinwords'* *'cinw'* | |
1425 'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch") | |
1426 local to buffer | |
1427 {not in Vi} | |
1428 {not available when compiled without both the | |
1429 |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features} | |
1430 These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when | |
1431 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at | |
1432 an appropriate place (inside {}). | |
1433 Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't | |
1434 matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase: | |
1435 "if,If,IF". | |
1436 | |
1437 *'clipboard'* *'cb'* | |
1438 'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux" | |
1439 for X-windows, "" otherwise) | |
1440 global | |
1441 {not in Vi} | |
1442 {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard| | |
1443 feature is included} | |
1444 This option is a list of comma separated names. | |
1445 These names are recognized: | |
1446 | |
1447 unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*' | |
1448 for all yank, delete, change and put operations which | |
1449 would normally go to the unnamed register. When a | |
1450 register is explicitly specified, it will always be | |
1451 used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard' | |
1452 or not. The clipboard register can always be | |
1453 explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see | |
1454 |gui-clipboard|. | |
1455 | |
2654 | 1456 unnamedplus A variant of "unnamed" flag which uses the clipboard |
1457 register '+' (|quoteplus|) instead of register '*' for | |
1458 all operations except yank. Yank shall copy the text | |
1459 into register '+' and also into '*' when "unnamed" is | |
1460 included. | |
2662 | 1461 Only available with the |+X11| feature. |
2654 | 1462 Availability can be checked with: > |
1463 if has('unnamedplus') | |
1464 < | |
7 | 1465 autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present, |
1466 then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual | |
1467 area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the | |
1468 windowing system's global selection or put the | |
1469 selected text on the clipboard used by the selection | |
1470 register "*. See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for | |
1471 details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in | |
1472 'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this | |
1473 "autoselect" flag is used. | |
1474 Also applies to the modeless selection. | |
1475 | |
1476 autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection | |
1477 only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'. | |
1478 | |
1904 | 1479 html When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when |
1480 pasting. When putting text on the clipboard, mark it | |
1481 as HTML. This works to copy rendered HTML from | |
1482 Firefox, paste it as raw HTML in Vim, select the HTML | |
1483 in Vim and paste it in a rich edit box in Firefox. | |
2240
6b4879aea261
Add test for gettabvar() and settabvar().
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2220
diff
changeset
|
1484 You probably want to add this only temporarily, |
6b4879aea261
Add test for gettabvar() and settabvar().
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2220
diff
changeset
|
1485 possibly use BufEnter autocommands. |
1904 | 1486 Only supported for GTK version 2 and later. |
1487 Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature. | |
1488 | |
7 | 1489 exclude:{pattern} |
1490 Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of | |
1491 the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no | |
1492 connection will be made to the X server. This is | |
1493 useful in this situation: | |
1494 - Running Vim in a console. | |
1495 - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another | |
1496 display. | |
1497 - You do not want to connect to the X server in the | |
1498 console, but do want this in a terminal emulator. | |
1499 To never connect to the X server use: > | |
1500 exclude:.* | |
1501 < This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument. | |
1502 Note that when there is no connection to the X server | |
1503 the window title won't be restored and the clipboard | |
1504 cannot be accessed. | |
1505 The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is | |
1506 interpreted as if 'magic' was on. | |
1507 The rest of the option value will be used for | |
1508 {pattern}, this must be the last entry. | |
1509 | |
1510 *'cmdheight'* *'ch'* | |
1511 'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1) | |
1512 global | |
1513 {not in Vi} | |
1514 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding | |
1515 |hit-enter| prompts. | |
824 | 1516 The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab |
1517 page can have a different value. | |
7 | 1518 |
1519 *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'* | |
1520 'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7) | |
1521 global | |
1522 {not in Vi} | |
1523 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| | |
1524 feature} | |
1525 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin| | |
1526 | |
2608
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1527 *'colorcolumn'* *'cc'* |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1528 'colorcolumn' 'cc' string (default "") |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1529 local to window |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1530 {not in Vi} |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1531 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1532 feature} |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1533 'colorcolumn' is a comma separated list of screen columns that are |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1534 highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|. Useful to align |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1535 text. Will make screen redrawing slower. |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1536 The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1537 '+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. > |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1538 |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1539 :set cc=+1 " highlight column after 'textwidth' |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1540 :set cc=+1,+2,+3 " highlight three columns after 'textwidth' |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1541 :hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1542 < |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1543 When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used. |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1544 A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted. |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1545 |
7 | 1546 *'columns'* *'co'* *E594* |
1547 'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width) | |
1548 global | |
1549 {not in Vi} | |
1550 Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal | |
161 | 1551 initialization and does not have to be set by hand. Also see |
1552 |posix-screen-size|. | |
7 | 1553 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this |
1554 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want | |
1555 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. | |
1556 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical | |
1152 | 1557 number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up. For |
1558 the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to | |
1559 what fits on the screen. You can use this command to get the widest | |
1560 window possible: > | |
1561 :set columns=9999 | |
1562 < Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000. | |
7 | 1563 |
1564 *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525* | |
1565 'comments' 'com' string (default | |
1566 "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-") | |
1567 local to buffer | |
1568 {not in Vi} | |
1569 {not available when compiled without the |+comments| | |
1570 feature} | |
1571 A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See | |
1572 |format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to | |
1573 insert a space. | |
1574 | |
1575 *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537* | |
1576 'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/") | |
1577 local to buffer | |
1578 {not in Vi} | |
1579 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
1580 feature} | |
1581 A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the | |
1582 comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see | |
1583 |fold-marker|. | |
1584 | |
1585 *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'* | |
819 | 1586 'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| |
1587 file is found) | |
7 | 1588 global |
1589 {not in Vi} | |
1590 This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or | |
1591 make Vim behave in a more useful way. | |
1592 This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset, | |
1593 other options are also changed as a side effect. CAREFUL: Setting or | |
1594 resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings | |
10 | 1595 are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc. If you |
7 | 1596 set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the |
1597 very start. | |
1598 By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the | |
1599 options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim | |
1600 just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible' | |
1601 option. | |
819 | 1602 When a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file is found while Vim is starting up, |
378 | 1603 this option is switched off, and all options that have not been |
1604 modified will be set to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means | |
819 | 1605 that when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file exists, Vim will use the Vim |
378 | 1606 defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't |
1152 | 1607 happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file, nor for a file given |
1608 with the |-u| argument). Also see |compatible-default| and | |
1609 |posix-compliance|. | |
7 | 1610 You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with |
1611 "-N". See |-C| and |-N|. | |
1612 Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options | |
1613 that have a different Vi and Vim default value. See the options | |
1614 marked with a '+' below. Other options are not modified. | |
1615 At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set | |
1616 or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible. See the table | |
10 | 1617 below. This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible |
7 | 1618 editing. |
1619 See also 'cpoptions'. | |
1620 | |
1621 option + set value effect ~ | |
1622 | |
1623 'allowrevins' off no CTRL-_ command | |
1624 'backupcopy' Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy | |
1625 others: "auto" copy or rename backup file | |
1626 'backspace' "" normal backspace | |
1627 'backup' off no backup file | |
1628 'cindent' off no C code indentation | |
1629 'cedit' + "" no key to open the |cmdwin| | |
1630 'cpoptions' + (all flags) Vi-compatible flags | |
1631 'cscopetag' off don't use cscope for ":tag" | |
1632 'cscopetagorder' 0 see |cscopetagorder| | |
1633 'cscopeverbose' off see |cscopeverbose| | |
1634 'digraph' off no digraphs | |
1635 'esckeys' + off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode | |
1636 'expandtab' off tabs not expanded to spaces | |
1637 'fileformats' + "" no automatic file format detection, | |
1638 "dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2 | |
1639 'formatoptions' + "vt" Vi compatible formatting | |
1640 'gdefault' off no default 'g' flag for ":s" | |
1641 'history' + 0 no commandline history | |
1642 'hkmap' off no Hebrew keyboard mapping | |
1643 'hkmapp' off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping | |
1644 'hlsearch' off no highlighting of search matches | |
1645 'incsearch' off no incremental searching | |
1646 'indentexpr' "" no indenting by expression | |
1647 'insertmode' off do not start in Insert mode | |
1648 'iskeyword' + "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric | |
1649 characters and '_' | |
1650 'joinspaces' on insert 2 spaces after period | |
1651 'modeline' + off no modelines | |
1652 'more' + off no pauses in listings | |
1653 'revins' off no reverse insert | |
1654 'ruler' off no ruler | |
1655 'scrolljump' 1 no jump scroll | |
1656 'scrolloff' 0 no scroll offset | |
1657 'shiftround' off indent not rounded to shiftwidth | |
1658 'shortmess' + "" no shortening of messages | |
1659 'showcmd' + off command characters not shown | |
1660 'showmode' + off current mode not shown | |
1661 'smartcase' off no automatic ignore case switch | |
1662 'smartindent' off no smart indentation | |
1663 'smarttab' off no smart tab size | |
1664 'softtabstop' 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions | |
1665 'startofline' on goto startofline with some commands | |
1666 'tagrelative' + off tag file names are not relative | |
1667 'textauto' + off no automatic textmode detection | |
1668 'textwidth' 0 no automatic line wrap | |
1669 'tildeop' off tilde is not an operator | |
1670 'ttimeout' off no terminal timeout | |
1671 'whichwrap' + "" left-right movements don't wrap | |
1672 'wildchar' + CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab> | |
1673 use CTRL-E for cmdline completion | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1674 'writebackup' on or off depends on the |+writebackup| feature |
7 | 1675 |
1676 *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535* | |
1677 'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i") | |
1678 local to buffer | |
1679 {not in Vi} | |
1680 This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works | |
1681 when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line | |
1682 completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion | |
1683 and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags: | |
1684 . scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored) | |
1685 w scan buffers from other windows | |
1686 b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list | |
1687 u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list | |
1688 U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list | |
1689 k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option | |
703 | 1690 kspell use the currently active spell checking |spell| |
7 | 1691 k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given, |
1692 patterns are valid too. For example: > | |
1693 :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish | |
1694 < s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option | |
1695 s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns | |
1696 are valid too. | |
1697 i scan current and included files | |
1698 d scan current and included files for defined name or macro | |
1699 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D| | |
1700 ] tag completion | |
1701 t same as "]" | |
1702 | |
1703 Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are | |
1704 not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files | |
1705 (gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for | |
1706 whole-line completion. | |
1707 | |
1708 The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan: | |
1709 1. the current buffer | |
1710 2. buffers in other windows | |
1711 3. other loaded buffers | |
1712 4. unloaded buffers | |
1713 5. tags | |
1714 6. included files | |
1715 | |
1716 As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'- | |
233 | 1717 based expansion (e.g., dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns |
1718 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions). | |
7 | 1719 |
12 | 1720 *'completefunc'* *'cfu'* |
1721 'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty) | |
1722 local to buffer | |
1723 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1724 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1725 or |+insert_expand| features} |
623 | 1726 This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion |
1727 with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U| | |
648 | 1728 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is |
1729 invoked and what it should return. | |
2642 | 1730 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
1731 security reasons. | |
14 | 1732 |
540 | 1733 *'completeopt'* *'cot'* |
730 | 1734 'completeopt' 'cot' string (default: "menu,preview") |
540 | 1735 global |
766 | 1736 {not available when compiled without the |
1737 |+insert_expand| feature} | |
540 | 1738 {not in Vi} |
665 | 1739 A comma separated list of options for Insert mode completion |
1740 |ins-completion|. The supported values are: | |
540 | 1741 |
1742 menu Use a popup menu to show the possible completions. The | |
1743 menu is only shown when there is more than one match and | |
1744 sufficient colors are available. |ins-completion-menu| | |
1745 | |
707 | 1746 menuone Use the popup menu also when there is only one match. |
856 | 1747 Useful when there is additional information about the |
707 | 1748 match, e.g., what file it comes from. |
1749 | |
836 | 1750 longest Only insert the longest common text of the matches. If |
1751 the menu is displayed you can use CTRL-L to add more | |
1752 characters. Whether case is ignored depends on the kind | |
1753 of completion. For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option is | |
1754 used. | |
665 | 1755 |
730 | 1756 preview Show extra information about the currently selected |
1152 | 1757 completion in the preview window. Only works in |
1758 combination with "menu" or "menuone". | |
1759 | |
730 | 1760 |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1761 *'concealcursor'* *'cocu'* |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1762 'concealcursor' 'cocu' string (default: "") |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1763 local to window |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1764 {not in Vi} |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1765 {not available when compiled without the |+conceal| |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1766 feature} |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1767 Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed. |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1768 When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1769 other lines. |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1770 n Normal mode |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1771 v Visual mode |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1772 i Insert mode |
2382
3a5ededa240a
Add the 'c' flag to 'concealcursor'.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2380
diff
changeset
|
1773 c Command line editing, for 'incsearch' |
3a5ededa240a
Add the 'c' flag to 'concealcursor'.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2380
diff
changeset
|
1774 |
2400
e6f1424dd66a
Let 'v' flag in 'concealcursor' apply to all lines in the Visual area.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2394
diff
changeset
|
1775 'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor. |
2382
3a5ededa240a
Add the 'c' flag to 'concealcursor'.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2380
diff
changeset
|
1776 A useful value is "nc". This is used in help files. So long as you |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1777 are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1778 or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1779 you can see what you are doing. |
2380
b47748aa3236
Don't conceal text in lines inside the Visual area.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
1780 Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's |
b47748aa3236
Don't conceal text in lines inside the Visual area.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
1781 displayed. E.g., when moving vertically it may change column. |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1782 |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1783 |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1784 'conceallevel' 'cole' *'conceallevel'* *'cole'* |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1785 number (default 0) |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1786 local to window |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1787 {not in Vi} |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1788 {not available when compiled without the |+conceal| |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1789 feature} |
2340
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1790 Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal| |
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1791 is shown: |
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1792 |
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1793 Value Effect ~ |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1794 0 Text is shown normally |
2426 | 1795 1 Each block of concealed text is replaced with one |
1796 character. If the syntax item does not have a custom | |
1797 replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the | |
1798 character defined in 'listchars' is used (default is a | |
1799 space). | |
1800 It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group. | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1801 2 Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1802 custom replacement character defined (see |
2426 | 1803 |:syn-cchar|). |
2349
586a459f3980
Never hide text for conceal in cursor line. Do hide when there is
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
1804 3 Concealed text is completely hidden. |
586a459f3980
Never hide text for conceal in cursor line. Do hide when there is
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
1805 |
586a459f3980
Never hide text for conceal in cursor line. Do hide when there is
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
1806 Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1807 edit and copy the text. This can be changed with the 'concealcursor' |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1808 option. |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
1809 |
7 | 1810 *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'* |
1811 'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off) | |
1812 global | |
1813 {not in Vi} | |
1814 When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally | |
1815 fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e", | |
1816 instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current | |
1817 file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer. | |
1818 If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one | |
1819 command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm| | |
1820 command. | |
1821 Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. | |
1822 | |
1823 *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'* | |
1824 'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off) | |
1825 global | |
1826 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} | |
1827 When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character. | |
10 | 1828 This should work in most cases. Also see |'bioskey'|. Together, |
7 | 1829 three methods of console input are available: |
1830 'conskey' 'bioskey' action ~ | |
1831 on on or off direct console input | |
1832 off on BIOS | |
1833 off off STDIN | |
1834 | |
1835 *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'* | |
1836 'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off) | |
1837 local to buffer | |
1838 {not in Vi} | |
1839 Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a | |
1840 new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of | |
1841 tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled, | |
1842 in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the | |
1843 new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the | |
1621 | 1844 existing line. 'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab |
1845 remains a Tab. If the new indent is greater than on the existing | |
7 | 1846 line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner. |
1847 NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
1848 Also see 'preserveindent'. | |
1849 | |
1850 *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'* | |
1851 'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs", | |
1852 Vi default: all flags) | |
1853 global | |
1854 {not in Vi} | |
1855 A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present | |
10 | 1856 this indicates vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where |
7 | 1857 not being vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred. |
1858 'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options". | |
1859 Commas can be added for readability. | |
1860 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
1861 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
1862 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
1863 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
164 | 1864 NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when |
1865 the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1866 variable exists |posix|. This means Vim tries to behave like the |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1867 POSIX specification. |
7 | 1868 |
1869 contains behavior ~ | |
1870 *cpo-a* | |
1871 a When included, a ":read" command with a file name | |
1872 argument will set the alternate file name for the | |
1873 current window. | |
1874 *cpo-A* | |
1875 A When included, a ":write" command with a file name | |
1876 argument will set the alternate file name for the | |
1877 current window. | |
1878 *cpo-b* | |
1879 b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of | |
1880 the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping, | |
1881 the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next | |
1882 command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to | |
1883 include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all | |
1884 mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands. | |
1885 See also |map_bar|. | |
1886 *cpo-B* | |
1887 B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings, | |
1888 abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands. | |
1889 Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a | |
1890 CTRL-V. For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>" | |
1891 results in X being mapped to: | |
1892 'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>) | |
1893 'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters) | |
1894 ('<' excluded in both cases) | |
1895 *cpo-c* | |
1896 c Searching continues at the end of any match at the | |
1897 cursor position, but not further than the start of the | |
1898 next line. When not present searching continues | |
1899 one character from the cursor position. With 'c' | |
1900 "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating | |
1901 "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches. | |
1902 *cpo-C* | |
1903 C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a | |
1904 backslash. See |line-continuation|. | |
1905 *cpo-d* | |
1906 d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use | |
1907 the tags file relative to the current file, but the | |
1908 tags file in the current directory. | |
1909 *cpo-D* | |
1910 D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode | |
1911 commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and | |
1912 |t|. | |
1913 *cpo-e* | |
1914 e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a | |
1915 <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not | |
1916 linewise. If this flag is not present, the register | |
1917 is not linewise and the last line does not end in a | |
1918 <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line | |
1919 and can be edited before hitting <CR>. | |
1920 *cpo-E* | |
1921 E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or | |
1922 "gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when | |
1923 at least one character is to be operate on. Example: | |
1924 This makes "y0" fail in the first column. | |
1925 *cpo-f* | |
1926 f When included, a ":read" command with a file name | |
1927 argument will set the file name for the current buffer, | |
1928 if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet. | |
1929 *cpo-F* | |
1930 F When included, a ":write" command with a file name | |
1931 argument will set the file name for the current | |
1932 buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name | |
590 | 1933 yet. Also see |cpo-P|. |
7 | 1934 *cpo-g* |
1935 g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument. | |
164 | 1936 *cpo-H* |
1937 H When using "I" on a line with only blanks, insert | |
1938 before the last blank. Without this flag insert after | |
1939 the last blank. | |
7 | 1940 *cpo-i* |
1941 i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will | |
1942 leave it modified. | |
10 | 1943 *cpo-I* |
1944 I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting | |
1945 indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent. | |
7 | 1946 *cpo-j* |
1947 j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.', | |
1948 not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'. | |
1949 *cpo-J* | |
1950 J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after | |
233 | 1951 the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as |
7 | 1952 white space. |
1953 *cpo-k* | |
1954 k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in | |
1955 mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu | |
1956 commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[ | |
1957 is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X | |
1958 being mapped to: | |
1959 'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters) | |
1960 'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code) | |
1961 Also see the '<' flag below. | |
1962 *cpo-K* | |
1963 K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is | |
1964 halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when | |
1965 only part of the second <F1> has been read. It | |
1966 enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>. | |
1967 *cpo-l* | |
1968 l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken | |
168 | 1969 literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special. |
1970 See |/[]| | |
7 | 1971 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't' |
1972 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab> | |
168 | 1973 Also see |cpo-\|. |
7 | 1974 *cpo-L* |
1975 L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin', | |
1976 'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode | |
1977 (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of | |
1978 the normal behavior of a <Tab>. | |
1979 *cpo-m* | |
1980 m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a | |
1981 second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half | |
1982 a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'| | |
1983 *cpo-M* | |
1984 M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into | |
1985 account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer | |
1986 parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores | |
1987 backslashes, which is Vi compatible. | |
1988 *cpo-n* | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1989 n When included, the column used for 'number' and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1990 'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1991 lines. |
7 | 1992 *cpo-o* |
1993 o Line offset to search command is not remembered for | |
1994 next search. | |
1995 *cpo-O* | |
1996 O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even | |
1997 when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a | |
1998 protection against a file unexpectedly created by | |
1999 someone else. Vi didn't complain about this. | |
2000 *cpo-p* | |
2001 p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a | |
2002 slightly better algorithm is used. | |
590 | 2003 *cpo-P* |
2004 P When included, a ":write" command that appends to a | |
2005 file will set the file name for the current buffer, if | |
2006 the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and | |
2007 the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|. | |
164 | 2008 *cpo-q* |
2009 q When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the | |
2010 position where it would be when joining two lines. | |
7 | 2011 *cpo-r* |
2012 r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search | |
2013 command, instead of the actually used search string. | |
2014 *cpo-R* | |
2015 R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag | |
2016 marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used. | |
2017 *cpo-s* | |
2018 s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the | |
2019 first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0. | |
10 | 2020 And it is the default. If not present the options are |
7 | 2021 set when the buffer is created. |
2022 *cpo-S* | |
2023 S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer | |
2024 (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and | |
2025 'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting. | |
2026 The options are set to the values in the current | |
2027 buffer. When you change an option and go to another | |
2028 buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the | |
2029 buffer options global to all buffers. | |
2030 | |
2031 's' 'S' copy buffer options | |
2032 no no when buffer created | |
2033 yes no when buffer first entered (default) | |
2034 X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.) | |
2035 *cpo-t* | |
2036 t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for | |
2037 "n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in | |
2038 the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the | |
2039 last used search pattern. | |
2040 *cpo-u* | |
10 | 2041 u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|. |
7 | 2042 *cpo-v* |
2043 v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in | |
2044 Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are | |
2045 erased from the screen right away. With this flag the | |
2046 screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced | |
2047 characters. | |
2048 *cpo-w* | |
2049 w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one | |
2050 character and not all blanks until the start of the | |
2051 next word. | |
2052 *cpo-W* | |
2053 W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!" | |
2054 overwrites a readonly file, if possible. | |
2055 *cpo-x* | |
2056 x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line. | |
2057 The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line, | |
2058 because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>| | |
164 | 2059 *cpo-X* |
2060 X When using a count with "R" the replaced text is | |
2061 deleted only once. Also when repeating "R" with "." | |
2062 and a count. | |
7 | 2063 *cpo-y* |
2064 y A yank command can be redone with ".". | |
164 | 2065 *cpo-Z* |
2066 Z When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set, | |
2067 don't reset 'readonly'. | |
7 | 2068 *cpo-!* |
2069 ! When redoing a filter command, use the last used | |
2070 external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last | |
2071 used -filter- command is used. | |
2072 *cpo-$* | |
2073 $ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the | |
2074 line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text. | |
2075 The changed text will be overwritten when you type the | |
2076 new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any | |
2077 command that moves the cursor from the insertion | |
2078 point. | |
2079 *cpo-%* | |
2080 % Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command. | |
2081 Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc. | |
2082 Does not recognize "/*" and "*/". | |
2083 Parens inside single and double quotes are also | |
2084 counted, causing a string that contains a paren to | |
2085 disturb the matching. For example, in a line like | |
2086 "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not | |
2087 match the last one. When this flag is not included, | |
2088 parens inside single and double quotes are treated | |
2089 specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes, | |
2090 everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a | |
2091 paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if | |
10 | 2092 there is one). This works very well for C programs. |
36 | 2093 This flag is also used for other features, such as |
2094 C-indenting. | |
161 | 2095 *cpo--* |
2096 - When included, a vertical movement command fails when | |
632 | 2097 it would go above the first line or below the last |
2098 line. Without it the cursor moves to the first or | |
2099 last line, unless it already was in that line. | |
161 | 2100 Applies to the commands "-", "k", CTRL-P, "+", "j", |
632 | 2101 CTRL-N, CTRL-J and ":1234". |
39 | 2102 *cpo-+* |
2103 + When included, a ":write file" command will reset the | |
2104 'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer | |
2105 itself may still be different from its file. | |
856 | 2106 *cpo-star* |
7 | 2107 * Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included, |
2108 ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area. | |
2109 *cpo-<* | |
2110 < Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>| | |
2111 form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of | |
10 | 2112 menu commands. For example, the command |
7 | 2113 ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to: |
2114 '<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters) | |
2115 '<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>) | |
2116 Also see the 'k' flag above. | |
164 | 2117 *cpo->* |
2118 > When appending to a register, put a line break before | |
2119 the appended text. | |
2120 | |
2121 POSIX flags. These are not included in the Vi default value, except | |
2122 when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix| | |
2123 | |
2124 contains behavior ~ | |
856 | 2125 *cpo-#* |
164 | 2126 # A count before "D", "o" and "O" has no effect. |
168 | 2127 *cpo-&* |
2128 & When ":preserve" was used keep the swap file when | |
2129 exiting normally while this buffer is still loaded. | |
2130 This flag is tested when exiting. | |
2131 *cpo-\* | |
2132 \ Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken | |
2133 literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]| | |
488 | 2134 '\' included: "/[ \-]" finds <Space>, '\' and '-' |
2135 '\' excluded: "/[ \-]" finds <Space> and '-' | |
2136 Also see |cpo-l|. | |
168 | 2137 *cpo-/* |
2138 / When "%" is used as the replacement string in a |:s| | |
2139 command, use the previous replacement string. |:s%| | |
164 | 2140 *cpo-{* |
2141 { The |{| and |}| commands also stop at a "{" character | |
2142 at the start of a line. | |
168 | 2143 *cpo-.* |
2144 . The ":chdir" and ":cd" commands fail if the current | |
2145 buffer is modified, unless ! is used. Vim doesn't | |
2146 need this, since it remembers the full path of an | |
2147 opened file. | |
164 | 2148 *cpo-bar* |
2149 | The value of the $LINES and $COLUMNS environment | |
2150 variables overrule the terminal size values obtained | |
2151 with system specific functions. | |
2152 | |
7 | 2153 |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2154 *'cryptmethod'* *'cm'* |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2155 'cryptmethod' string (default "zip") |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2156 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2157 {not in Vi} |
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2158 Method used for encryption when the buffer is written to a file: |
2184
5028c4d6d825
Fixed encryption big/little endian test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2180
diff
changeset
|
2159 *pkzip* |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2160 zip PkZip compatible method. A weak kind of encryption. |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2161 Backwards compatible with Vim 7.2 and older. |
2184
5028c4d6d825
Fixed encryption big/little endian test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2180
diff
changeset
|
2162 *blowfish* |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2163 blowfish Blowfish method. Strong encryption. Requires Vim 7.3 |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2164 or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.2 and older. |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2165 This adds a "seed" to the file, every time you write |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2166 the file the encrypted bytes will be different. |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2167 |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2168 When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2169 to the detected method of the file being read. Thus if you write it |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2170 without changing 'cryptmethod' the same method will be used. |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2171 Changing 'cryptmethod' does not mark the file as modified, you have to |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2172 explicitly write it, you don't get a warning unless there are other |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2173 modifications. Also see |:X|. |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2174 |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2175 When setting the global value to an empty string, it will end up with |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2176 the value "zip". When setting the local value to an empty string the |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2177 buffer will use the global value. |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2178 |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2179 When a new encryption method is added in a later version of Vim, and |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2180 the current version does not recognize it, you will get *E821* . |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2181 You need to edit this file with the later version of Vim. |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2182 |
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2183 |
7 | 2184 *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'* |
2185 'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0) | |
2186 global | |
2187 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2188 feature} | |
2189 {not in Vi} | |
2190 Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags. | |
2191 See |cscopepathcomp|. | |
2192 | |
2193 *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'* | |
2194 'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope") | |
2195 global | |
2196 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2197 feature} | |
2198 {not in Vi} | |
2199 Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|. | |
2200 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2201 security reasons. | |
2202 | |
2203 *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'* | |
2204 'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "") | |
2205 global | |
2206 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2207 or |+quickfix| features} | |
2208 {not in Vi} | |
2209 Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results. | |
2210 See |cscopequickfix|. | |
2211 | |
2873 | 2212 *'cscoperelative'* *'csre'* |
2213 'cscoperelative' 'csre' boolean (default off) | |
2214 global | |
2215 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2216 feature} | |
2217 {not in Vi} | |
2218 In the absence of a prefix (-P) for cscope. setting this option enables | |
2219 to use the basename of cscope.out path as the prefix. | |
2220 See |cscoperelative|. | |
2221 | |
7 | 2222 *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'* |
2223 'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off) | |
2224 global | |
2225 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2226 feature} | |
2227 {not in Vi} | |
2228 Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|. | |
2229 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2230 | |
2231 *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'* | |
2232 'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0) | |
2233 global | |
2234 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2235 feature} | |
2236 {not in Vi} | |
2237 Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See | |
2238 |cscopetagorder|. | |
2239 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
2240 | |
2241 *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'* | |
2242 *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'* | |
2243 'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off) | |
2244 global | |
2245 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2246 feature} | |
2247 {not in Vi} | |
2248 Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|. | |
2249 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2250 | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2251 *'cursorbind'* *'crb'* *'nocursorbind'* *'nocrb'* |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2252 'cursorbind' 'crb' boolean (default off) |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2253 local to window |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2254 {not in Vi} |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2255 {not available when compiled without the |+cursorbind| |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2256 feature} |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2257 When this option is set, as the cursor in the current |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2258 window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2259 this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2260 column. This option is useful for viewing the |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2261 differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode, |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2262 inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are |
2314
233eb4412f5d
Added 'colorcolumn' option. Partly by Gregor Uhlenheuer.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2302
diff
changeset
|
2263 taken into account. |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2264 |
743 | 2265 |
2266 *'cursorcolumn'* *'cuc'* *'nocursorcolumn'* *'nocuc'* | |
2267 'cursorcolumn' 'cuc' boolean (default off) | |
2268 local to window | |
2269 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
2270 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| |
743 | 2271 feature} |
2272 Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn | |
2273 |hl-CursorColumn|. Useful to align text. Will make screen redrawing | |
2274 slower. | |
826 | 2275 If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use |
2276 these autocommands: > | |
2277 au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn | |
2278 au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn | |
2279 < | |
743 | 2280 |
2281 *'cursorline'* *'cul'* *'nocursorline'* *'nocul'* | |
2282 'cursorline' 'cul' boolean (default off) | |
2283 local to window | |
2284 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
2285 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| |
743 | 2286 feature} |
2287 Highlight the screen line of the cursor with CursorLine | |
2288 |hl-CursorLine|. Useful to easily spot the cursor. Will make screen | |
2289 redrawing slower. | |
818 | 2290 When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it |
825 | 2291 easier to see the selected text. |
743 | 2292 |
2293 | |
7 | 2294 *'debug'* |
2295 'debug' string (default "") | |
2296 global | |
2297 {not in Vi} | |
839 | 2298 These values can be used: |
2299 msg Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given | |
2300 anyway. | |
2301 throw Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given | |
2302 anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|. | |
2303 beep A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be | |
2304 produced. | |
168 | 2305 The values can be combined, separated by a comma. |
839 | 2306 "msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or |
2307 'indentexpr'. | |
7 | 2308 |
2309 *'define'* *'def'* | |
2310 'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define") | |
2311 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2312 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 2313 Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search |
7 | 2314 pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the |
2315 commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is | |
2316 used to recognize the defined name after the match: | |
2317 {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char} | |
2318 See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space | |
2319 or backslash. | |
2320 The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be | |
2321 useful, to include const type declarations: > | |
2322 ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\) | |
2323 < When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes! | |
2324 | |
2325 *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'* | |
2326 'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off) | |
2327 global | |
2328 {not in Vi} | |
2329 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2330 feature} | |
2331 If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode | |
2332 "x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the | |
2333 default) the character along with its combining characters are | |
2334 deleted. | |
2335 Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"! | |
2336 | |
2337 This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one | |
2338 may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want | |
2339 to remove only the combining ones. | |
2340 | |
2341 *'dictionary'* *'dict'* | |
2342 'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "") | |
2343 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2344 {not in Vi} | |
2345 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words | |
2346 for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should | |
2347 contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several | |
2348 words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is | |
2349 preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes. | |
703 | 2350 When this option is empty, or an entry "spell" is present, spell |
2351 checking is enabled the currently active spelling is used. |spell| | |
10 | 2352 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces |
7 | 2353 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file |
2354 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. | |
99 | 2355 This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type. |
7 | 2356 Where to find a list of words? |
2357 - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words". | |
2358 - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory. | |
2359 - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection. | |
2360 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
2361 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
2362 uses another default. | |
2363 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. | |
2364 | |
2365 *'diff'* *'nodiff'* | |
2366 'diff' boolean (default off) | |
2367 local to window | |
2368 {not in Vi} | |
2369 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2370 feature} | |
2371 Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences | |
10 | 2372 between files. See |vimdiff|. |
7 | 2373 |
2374 *'dex'* *'diffexpr'* | |
2375 'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "") | |
2376 global | |
2377 {not in Vi} | |
2378 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2379 feature} | |
2380 Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two | |
2381 versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|. | |
2382 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2383 security reasons. | |
2384 | |
2385 *'dip'* *'diffopt'* | |
2386 'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler") | |
2387 global | |
2388 {not in Vi} | |
2389 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2390 feature} | |
10 | 2391 Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items. |
7 | 2392 All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma. |
2393 | |
2394 filler Show filler lines, to keep the text | |
2395 synchronized with a window that has inserted | |
2396 lines at the same position. Mostly useful | |
2397 when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind' | |
2398 is set. | |
2399 | |
2400 context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change | |
2401 and a fold that contains unchanged lines. | |
2402 When omitted a context of six lines is used. | |
2403 See |fold-diff|. | |
2404 | |
2405 icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A" | |
2406 are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag | |
2407 to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty. | |
2408 | |
2409 iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds | |
2410 the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if | |
2411 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation | |
2412 of the "diff" command for what this does | |
2413 exactly. It should ignore adding trailing | |
2414 white space, but not leading white space. | |
2415 | |
766 | 2416 horizontal Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless |
2417 explicitly specified otherwise). | |
2418 | |
2419 vertical Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless | |
2420 explicitly specified otherwise). | |
2421 | |
2422 foldcolumn:{n} Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when | |
2423 starting diff mode. Without this 2 is used. | |
2424 | |
7 | 2425 Examples: > |
2426 | |
2427 :set diffopt=filler,context:4 | |
2428 :set diffopt= | |
766 | 2429 :set diffopt=filler,foldcolumn:3 |
7 | 2430 < |
2431 *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'* | |
2432 'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off) | |
2433 global | |
2434 {not in Vi} | |
2435 {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs| | |
2436 feature} | |
2437 Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS> | |
2438 {char2}. See |digraphs|. | |
2439 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2440 | |
2441 *'directory'* *'dir'* | |
2442 'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", | |
2443 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:\tmp,c:\temp" | |
2444 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp") | |
2445 global | |
2446 List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas. | |
2447 - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is | |
2448 possible. | |
2449 - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is | |
2450 impossible!). | |
2451 - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as | |
2452 the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so | |
2453 it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden" | |
2454 attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible. | |
33 | 2455 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to |
7 | 2456 put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading |
2457 "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. | |
459 | 2458 - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//" |
2459 or "\\", the swap file name will be built from the complete path to | |
2460 the file with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. | |
2461 This will ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory. | |
1698 | 2462 On Win32, when a separating comma is following, you must use "//", |
2463 since "\\" will include the comma in the file name. | |
7 | 2464 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part |
2465 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory | |
2466 name, precede it with a backslash. | |
2467 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. | |
2468 - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'. | |
2469 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
2470 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to | |
2471 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > | |
2472 :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces | |
2473 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start | |
2474 of the option is removed. | |
2475 Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing | |
2476 the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is | |
2477 discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file. | |
2478 "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better | |
2479 choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap | |
2480 files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your | |
2481 home directory is tried first. | |
2482 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
2483 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
2484 uses another default. | |
2485 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2486 security reasons. | |
2487 {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"} | |
2488 | |
2489 *'display'* *'dy'* | |
2490 'display' 'dy' string (default "") | |
2491 global | |
2492 {not in Vi} | |
2493 Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of | |
2494 flags: | |
2495 lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line | |
10 | 2496 in a window will be displayed. When not included, a |
7 | 2497 last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines. |
2498 uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx> | |
2499 instead of using ^C and ~C. | |
2500 | |
2501 *'eadirection'* *'ead'* | |
2502 'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both") | |
2503 global | |
2504 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
2505 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 2506 feature} |
2507 Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies: | |
2508 ver vertically, width of windows is not affected | |
2509 hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected | |
2510 both width and height of windows is affected | |
2511 | |
2512 *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'* | |
2513 'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off) | |
2514 global | |
2515 Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be | |
2516 toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See | |
2517 also 'gdefault' option. | |
2518 Switching this option on is discouraged! | |
2519 | |
2520 *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543* | |
2521 'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG) | |
2522 global | |
2523 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2524 feature} | |
2525 {not in Vi} | |
2526 Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in | |
2527 the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the | |
2528 viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work | |
2529 with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values. | |
2530 | |
2531 NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the | |
39 | 2532 existing text in Vim. It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid. |
7 | 2533 It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim |
1152 | 2534 starts up. See |multibyte|. To reload the menus see |:menutrans|. |
7 | 2535 |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2536 This option cannot be set from a |modeline|. It would most likely |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2537 corrupt the text. |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2538 |
7 | 2539 NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to |
2540 "utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of | |
2541 'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and | |
2542 avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made | |
10 | 2543 the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal |
7 | 2544 versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files |
2545 without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty). | |
2546 | |
2547 The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'. | |
10 | 2548 This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with |
7 | 2549 iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'. |
2550 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2551 If you need to know whether 'encoding' is a multi-byte encoding, you |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2552 can use: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2553 if has("multi_byte_encoding") |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2554 < |
7 | 2555 Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will |
2556 be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If | |
2557 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be | |
2558 set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|. | |
2559 | |
2560 When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand | |
2561 event so that you can set up fonts if necessary. | |
2562 | |
2563 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus | |
2564 you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated | |
2565 to '-' signs. | |
2566 When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name. | |
2567 For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes | |
2568 "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8". | |
2569 | |
2570 Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected. | |
2571 This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the | |
2572 actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and | |
2573 'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using | |
2574 utf-8. | |
2575 | |
2576 When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8. | |
2577 You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the | |
2578 |viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus | |
2579 setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has | |
2580 effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty. | |
448 | 2581 |
2582 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was | |
2583 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed. | |
7 | 2584 |
2585 *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'* | |
2586 'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on) | |
2587 local to buffer | |
2588 {not in Vi} | |
2589 When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option | |
10 | 2590 is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file. This |
7 | 2591 option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless |
2592 the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in | |
2593 which case it is reset. Normally you don't have to set or reset this | |
2594 option. When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the | |
2595 file. When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a | |
2596 <EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file | |
2597 the situation from the original file can be kept. But you can change | |
2598 it if you want to. | |
2599 | |
2600 *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'* | |
2601 'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on) | |
2602 global | |
2603 {not in Vi} | |
2604 When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after | |
33 | 2605 splitting or closing a window. This also happens the moment the |
2606 option is switched on. When off, splitting a window will reduce the | |
2607 size of the current window and leave the other windows the same. When | |
2608 closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it | |
2609 (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright'). | |
7 | 2610 When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size |
2611 is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The | |
2612 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected. | |
1354 | 2613 Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting |
2614 'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2615 If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2616 currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2617 the future). |
7 | 2618 |
2619 *'equalprg'* *'ep'* | |
2620 'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "") | |
2621 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2622 {not in Vi} | |
2623 External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty | |
1621 | 2624 the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent' |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2625 or 'indentexpr'. When Vim was compiled without internal formatting, |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2626 the "indent" program is used. |
10 | 2627 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
7 | 2628 about including spaces and backslashes. |
2629 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2630 security reasons. | |
2631 | |
2632 *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'* | |
2633 'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off) | |
2634 global | |
2635 Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only | |
2636 makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always | |
2637 for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal | |
10 | 2638 mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep, |
7 | 2639 screen flash or do nothing. |
2640 | |
2641 *'errorfile'* *'ef'* | |
2642 'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err", | |
2643 others: "errors.err") | |
2644 global | |
2645 {not in Vi} | |
2646 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
2647 feature} | |
2648 Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|). | |
2649 When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the | |
2650 following argument. See |-q|. | |
2651 NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that. | |
2652 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
2653 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
2654 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2655 security reasons. | |
2656 | |
2657 *'errorformat'* *'efm'* | |
2658 'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long) | |
2659 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2660 {not in Vi} | |
2661 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
2662 feature} | |
2663 Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file | |
2664 (see |errorformat|). | |
2665 | |
2666 *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'* | |
2667 'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
2668 global | |
2669 {not in Vi} | |
2670 Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert | |
2671 mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be | |
2672 used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of | |
2673 this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of | |
2674 after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to | |
2675 try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that | |
2676 when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys | |
2677 won't work by default. | |
2678 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
2679 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
2680 | |
2681 *'eventignore'* *'ei'* | |
2682 'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "") | |
2683 global | |
2684 {not in Vi} | |
2685 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd| | |
2686 feature} | |
2687 A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored. | |
844 | 2688 When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand |
2689 events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed. | |
7 | 2690 Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: > |
2691 :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave | |
2692 < | |
2693 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'* | |
2694 'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off) | |
2695 local to buffer | |
2696 {not in Vi} | |
2697 In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a | |
10 | 2698 <Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and |
7 | 2699 when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is |
2700 on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|. | |
2701 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2702 | |
2703 *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'* | |
2704 'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off) | |
2705 global | |
2706 {not in Vi} | |
2707 Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current | |
2708 directory. If you switch this option on you should also consider | |
2709 setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|). Using a local | |
2710 .exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care! | |
2711 also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|. | |
2712 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2713 security reasons. | |
2714 | |
2715 *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213* | |
2716 'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "") | |
2717 local to buffer | |
2718 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2719 feature} | |
2720 {not in Vi} | |
2721 Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer. | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2722 |
7 | 2723 When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2724 done when writing the file. For reading see below. |
7 | 2725 When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be |
2726 used (no conversion when reading or writing a file). | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2727 Conversion will also be done when 'encoding' and 'fileencoding' are |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2728 both a Unicode encoding and 'fileencoding' is not utf-8. That's |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2729 because internally Unicode is always stored as utf-8. |
7 | 2730 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2731 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding, conversion |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2732 is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2733 results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2734 characters may be lost! |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2735 |
7 | 2736 See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be |
2737 specified that can be handled by the converter, see | |
2738 |mbyte-conversion|. | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2739 |
7 | 2740 When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'. |
2741 To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting | |
1152 | 2742 'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument. One exception: when |
2743 'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used. | |
692 | 2744 For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used. |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2745 |
7 | 2746 Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored. |
2747 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus | |
2748 you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are | |
2749 replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for | |
2750 'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example | |
2751 "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2". | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2752 |
7 | 2753 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' |
2754 option is set, because the file would be different when written. | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2755 |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2756 Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2757 AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2758 written. If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2759 'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q". |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2760 |
7 | 2761 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. |
2762 | |
2763 *'fe'* | |
2764 NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the | |
10 | 2765 whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The |
7 | 2766 old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used. |
2767 | |
2768 *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'* | |
39 | 2769 'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom", |
2770 "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when | |
2771 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value) | |
7 | 2772 global |
2773 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2774 feature} | |
2775 {not in Vi} | |
2776 This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit | |
2777 an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first | |
2778 mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one | |
2779 in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works, | |
10 | 2780 'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to |
7 | 2781 an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used. |
2782 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When | |
2783 'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants) | |
2784 conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse | |
2785 conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not | |
596 | 2786 "utf-8" some non-ASCII characters may be lost! You can use |
2787 the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters | |
2788 that can't be converted. | |
7 | 2789 For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings |
2790 will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except | |
2791 "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer | |
2792 another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your | |
2793 preferred encoding is to be used. Example: > | |
2794 au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 | | |
2795 \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif | |
2796 < This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain | |
2797 non-blank characters. | |
596 | 2798 When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is |
2799 not used. | |
692 | 2800 Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value |
2801 of 'fileencoding' is used instead. You can set it with: > | |
2802 :setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2 | |
2803 < This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than | |
2804 an empty file. | |
7 | 2805 The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM |
2806 (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded | |
2807 by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly. | |
2808 An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last, | |
2809 because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always | |
2810 accepted. | |
39 | 2811 The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the |
2812 environment. This is the default value for 'encoding'. It is useful | |
2813 when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a | |
2814 non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian. | |
777 | 2815 When 'encoding' is "utf-8" and a file contains an illegal byte |
2816 sequence it won't be recognized as UTF-8. You can use the |8g8| | |
2817 command to find the illegal byte sequence. | |
7 | 2818 WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG: |
2819 latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used | |
2820 utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8 | |
2821 file | |
2822 cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used | |
2823 If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified. | |
2824 See 'fileencoding' for the possible values. | |
2825 Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file | |
2826 is read. | |
2827 | |
2828 *'fileformat'* *'ff'* | |
2829 'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos", | |
2830 Unix default: "unix", | |
2831 Macintosh default: "mac") | |
2832 local to buffer | |
2833 {not in Vi} | |
2834 This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for | |
2835 reading/writing the buffer from/to a file: | |
2836 dos <CR> <NL> | |
2837 unix <NL> | |
2838 mac <CR> | |
2839 When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored. | |
2840 See |file-formats| and |file-read|. | |
2841 For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'. | |
2842 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O | |
2843 works like it was set to "unix'. | |
2844 This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and | |
2845 'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off. | |
2846 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' | |
2847 option is set, because the file would be different when written. | |
2848 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. | |
2849 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos", | |
2850 'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset. | |
2851 | |
2852 *'fileformats'* *'ffs'* | |
2853 'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default: | |
2854 Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix", | |
2855 Vim Unix: "unix,dos", | |
2856 Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos", | |
2857 Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos", | |
2858 Vi others: "") | |
2859 global | |
2860 {not in Vi} | |
2861 This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when | |
2862 starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing | |
2863 buffer: | |
2864 - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used | |
2865 always. It is not set automatically. | |
2866 - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer | |
10 | 2867 is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The |
7 | 2868 'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing |
2869 buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to. | |
2870 - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic | |
2871 <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to | |
2872 edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>: | |
2873 1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos", | |
2874 'fileformat' is set to "dos". | |
2875 2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat' | |
10 | 2876 is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a |
7 | 2877 preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos". |
2587 | 2878 3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if 'fileformats' |
2879 includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac". | |
2880 This means that "mac" is only chosen when: | |
2881 "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and | |
2882 "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file. | |
2883 Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before | |
2884 the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in | |
2642 | 2885 the first few lines, "mac" is used. |
7 | 2886 4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from |
2887 'fileformats' is used. | |
2888 When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but | |
2889 this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that | |
2890 file only, the option is not changed. | |
2891 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used. | |
2892 | |
2662 | 2893 Note that when Vim starts up with an empty buffer this option is not |
2681 | 2894 used. Set 'fileformat' in your .vimrc instead. |
2662 | 2895 |
7 | 2896 For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that |
2897 are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be | |
2898 done: | |
2899 - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos | |
2900 format will be used. | |
2901 - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection | |
2902 is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a | |
2903 <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is | |
2904 used. | |
2905 Also see |file-formats|. | |
2906 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty | |
2907 string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset, | |
2908 otherwise 'textauto' is set. | |
2909 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
2910 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
2911 | |
2912 *'filetype'* *'ft'* | |
2913 'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "") | |
2914 local to buffer | |
2915 {not in Vi} | |
2916 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd| | |
2917 feature} | |
2918 When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered. | |
2919 All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be | |
2920 executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file | |
2921 name. | |
2922 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type. | |
2923 This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable | |
2924 this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype| | |
2925 Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline, | |
2926 for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized. | |
782 | 2927 Example, for in an IDL file: |
2928 /* vim: set filetype=idl : */ ~ | |
2929 |FileType| |filetypes| | |
2930 When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype | |
2931 names. Example: | |
2932 /* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */ ~ | |
2933 This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype. | |
2934 This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files. More than | |
2935 one dot may appear. | |
7 | 2936 Do not confuse this option with 'osfiletype', which is for the file |
2937 type that is actually stored with the file. | |
2938 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or | |
2939 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. | |
36 | 2940 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 2941 |
2942 *'fillchars'* *'fcs'* | |
2943 'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-") | |
2944 global | |
2945 {not in Vi} | |
2946 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| | |
2947 and |+folding| features} | |
2948 Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators. | |
2949 It is a comma separated list of items: | |
2950 | |
2951 item default Used for ~ | |
2952 stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window | |
2953 stlnc:c ' ' or '-' statusline of the non-current windows | |
2954 vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit| | |
2955 fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext' | |
2956 diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option | |
2957 | |
10 | 2958 Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and |
7 | 2959 "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-' |
2960 otherwise. | |
2961 | |
2962 Example: > | |
2963 :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:- | |
2964 < This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also | |
2965 be used when there is highlighting. | |
2966 | |
819 | 2967 for "stl" and "stlnc" only single-byte values are supported. |
2968 | |
7 | 2969 The highlighting used for these items: |
2970 item highlight group ~ | |
2971 stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine| | |
2972 stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC| | |
2973 vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit| | |
2974 fold:c Folded |hl-Folded| | |
2975 diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete| | |
2976 | |
2977 *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'* | |
2978 'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198* | |
2979 global | |
2980 {not in Vi} | |
2981 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
2982 feature} | |
2983 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set. | |
2984 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to | |
10 | 2985 toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|. |
7 | 2986 |
2987 *'foldclose'* *'fcl'* | |
2988 'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "") | |
2989 global | |
2990 {not in Vi} | |
2991 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2992 feature} | |
2993 When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and | |
2994 its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to | |
2995 automatically close when moving out of them. | |
2996 | |
2997 *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'* | |
2998 'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0) | |
2999 local to window | |
3000 {not in Vi} | |
3001 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3002 feature} | |
3003 When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side | |
3004 of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum | |
3005 value is 12. | |
3006 See |folding|. | |
3007 | |
3008 *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'* | |
3009 'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on) | |
3010 local to window | |
3011 {not in Vi} | |
3012 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3013 feature} | |
3014 When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly | |
3015 switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with | |
3016 folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled | |
10 | 3017 with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when |
7 | 3018 'foldenable' is off. |
3019 This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold. | |
3020 See |folding|. | |
3021 | |
3022 *'foldexpr'* *'fde'* | |
3023 'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0") | |
3024 local to window | |
3025 {not in Vi} | |
3026 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3027 or |+eval| features} |
7 | 3028 The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated |
634 | 3029 for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. |
782 | 3030 |
634 | 3031 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
3032 |sandbox-option|. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3033 This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3034 on. |
634 | 3035 |
3036 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
3037 evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|. | |
7 | 3038 |
3039 *'foldignore'* *'fdi'* | |
3040 'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#") | |
3041 local to window | |
3042 {not in Vi} | |
3043 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3044 feature} | |
3045 Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with | |
3046 characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding | |
10 | 3047 lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character. |
7 | 3048 The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|. |
3049 | |
3050 *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'* | |
3051 'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0) | |
3052 local to window | |
3053 {not in Vi} | |
3054 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3055 feature} | |
3056 Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed. | |
3057 Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will | |
3058 close fewer folds. | |
3059 This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|. | |
3060 See |fold-foldlevel|. | |
3061 | |
3062 *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'* | |
3063 'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1) | |
3064 global | |
3065 {not in Vi} | |
3066 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3067 feature} | |
3068 Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window. | |
3069 Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero), | |
3070 some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99). | |
3071 This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline | |
10 | 3072 overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also |
7 | 3073 ignores this option and closes all folds. |
3074 It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to | |
3075 overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files. | |
3076 When the value is negative, it is not used. | |
3077 | |
3078 *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536* | |
3079 'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}") | |
3080 local to window | |
3081 {not in Vi} | |
3082 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3083 feature} | |
3084 The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There | |
3085 must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The | |
3086 marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow). | |
3087 See |fold-marker|. | |
3088 | |
3089 *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'* | |
3090 'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual") | |
3091 local to window | |
3092 {not in Vi} | |
3093 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3094 feature} | |
3095 The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values: | |
3096 |fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually. | |
3097 |fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold. | |
3098 |fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line. | |
3099 |fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds. | |
3100 |fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds. | |
3101 |fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed. | |
3102 | |
3103 *'foldminlines'* *'fml'* | |
3104 'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1) | |
3105 local to window | |
3106 {not in Vi} | |
3107 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3108 feature} | |
2709 | 3109 Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed |
3110 closed. Also for manually closed folds. With the default value of | |
3111 one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines. | |
3112 Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line. | |
2826 | 3113 Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed. After using |
7 | 3114 "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller |
3115 than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold. | |
3116 | |
3117 *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'* | |
3118 'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20) | |
3119 local to window | |
3120 {not in Vi} | |
3121 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3122 feature} | |
3123 Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax" | |
3124 methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more | |
3125 than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20. | |
3126 | |
3127 *'foldopen'* *'fdo'* | |
3128 'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix, | |
3129 search,tag,undo") | |
3130 global | |
3131 {not in Vi} | |
3132 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3133 feature} | |
3134 Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the | |
3135 command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated | |
3136 list of items. | |
2625 | 3137 NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. |
3138 Add the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect. | |
3139 (rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself) | |
3140 | |
7 | 3141 item commands ~ |
3142 all any | |
3143 block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc. | |
3144 hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc. | |
3145 insert any command in Insert mode | |
3146 jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc. | |
3147 mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc. | |
3148 percent "%" | |
3149 quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc. | |
3150 search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc. | |
3151 (not for a search pattern in a ":" command) | |
819 | 3152 Also for |[s| and |]s|. |
7 | 3153 tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc. |
3154 undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R | |
3155 When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%") | |
3156 this option is not used. This means the operator will include the | |
3157 whole closed fold. | |
3158 Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it | |
3159 very difficult to move onto a closed fold. | |
3160 In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open | |
3161 when text is inserted. | |
3162 To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or | |
3163 set the 'foldclose' option to "all". | |
3164 | |
3165 *'foldtext'* *'fdt'* | |
3166 'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()") | |
3167 local to window | |
3168 {not in Vi} | |
3169 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3170 feature} | |
3171 An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed | |
3172 fold. See |fold-foldtext|. | |
3173 | |
634 | 3174 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
3175 |sandbox-option|. | |
3176 | |
3177 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
3178 evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|. | |
3179 | |
7 | 3180 *'formatoptions'* *'fo'* |
3181 'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt") | |
3182 local to buffer | |
3183 {not in Vi} | |
3184 This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic | |
3185 formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is | |
3186 on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can | |
3187 be inserted for readability. | |
3188 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
3189 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
3190 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
3191 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
3192 | |
41 | 3193 *'formatlistpat'* *'flp'* |
3194 'formatlistpat' 'flp' string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*") | |
3195 local to buffer | |
3196 {not in Vi} | |
3197 A pattern that is used to recognize a list header. This is used for | |
3198 the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'. | |
3199 The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for | |
140 | 3200 the line below it. You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match |
41 | 3201 while still checking more characters. There must be a character |
3202 following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled | |
3203 like there is no match. | |
3204 The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation | |
3205 character and white space. | |
3206 | |
7 | 3207 *'formatprg'* *'fp'* |
3208 'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "") | |
3209 global | |
3210 {not in Vi} | |
3211 The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines | |
667 | 3212 selected with the |gq| operator. The program must take the input on |
7 | 3213 stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is |
557 | 3214 such a program. |
667 | 3215 If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead. |
3216 Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal | |
3217 format function will be used |C-indenting|. | |
557 | 3218 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
3219 about including spaces and backslashes. | |
667 | 3220 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
3221 |sandbox-option|. | |
3222 | |
3223 *'formatexpr'* *'fex'* | |
3224 'formatexpr' 'fex' string (default "") | |
3225 local to buffer | |
3226 {not in Vi} | |
3227 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| | |
3228 feature} | |
3229 Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq| | |
2350
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2349
diff
changeset
|
3230 operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions'). When this |
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2349
diff
changeset
|
3231 option is empty 'formatprg' is used. |
844 | 3232 |
3233 The |v:lnum| variable holds the first line to be formatted. | |
856 | 3234 The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted. |
3235 The |v:char| variable holds the character that is going to be | |
2350
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2349
diff
changeset
|
3236 inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to |
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2349
diff
changeset
|
3237 automatic formatting. This can be empty. Don't insert |
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2349
diff
changeset
|
3238 it yet! |
844 | 3239 |
667 | 3240 Example: > |
681 | 3241 :set formatexpr=mylang#Format() |
667 | 3242 < This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the |
3243 autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload| | |
3244 | |
3245 The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding | |
3246 text beyond that limit. This happens under the same conditions as | |
3247 when internal formatting is used. Make sure the cursor is kept in the | |
3248 same spot relative to the text then! The |mode()| function will | |
2298
a3562a127cf6
When 'formatexpr' evaluates to non-zero fall back to internal formatting, also
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2290
diff
changeset
|
3249 return "i" or "R" in this situation. |
a3562a127cf6
When 'formatexpr' evaluates to non-zero fall back to internal formatting, also
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2290
diff
changeset
|
3250 |
a3562a127cf6
When 'formatexpr' evaluates to non-zero fall back to internal formatting, also
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2290
diff
changeset
|
3251 When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using |
a3562a127cf6
When 'formatexpr' evaluates to non-zero fall back to internal formatting, also
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2290
diff
changeset
|
3252 the internal format mechanism. |
667 | 3253 |
3254 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see | |
2662 | 3255 |sandbox-option|. That stops the option from working, since changing |
3256 the buffer text is not allowed. | |
667 | 3257 |
3258 *'fsync'* *'fs'* | |
36 | 3259 'fsync' 'fs' boolean (default on) |
3260 global | |
3261 {not in Vi} | |
3262 When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a | |
3263 file. This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely | |
3264 written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling. This | |
3265 will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop | |
3266 mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations. Be warned that | |
3267 turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash. On | |
3268 systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always | |
3269 off. | |
3270 Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files. | |
3271 | |
7 | 3272 *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'* |
3273 'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off) | |
3274 global | |
3275 {not in Vi} | |
3276 When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that | |
3277 all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag | |
3278 is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution | |
3279 of all or one match. See |complex-change|. | |
3280 | |
3281 command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~ | |
3282 :s/// subst. all subst. one | |
3283 :s///g subst. one subst. all | |
3284 :s///gg subst. all subst. one | |
3285 | |
3286 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
3287 | |
3288 *'grepformat'* *'gfm'* | |
3289 'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l%m,%f %l%m") | |
3290 global | |
3291 {not in Vi} | |
3292 Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output. | |
3293 This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the | |
3294 'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|. | |
3295 | |
3296 *'grepprg'* *'gp'* | |
3297 'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ", | |
3298 Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null", | |
3299 Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n", | |
3300 VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ") | |
3301 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
3302 {not in Vi} | |
233 | 3303 Program to use for the |:grep| command. This option may contain '%' |
7 | 3304 and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command- |
3305 line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments | |
3306 will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See | |
3307 |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
3308 When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep" | |
3309 also work well with a single file: > | |
3310 :set grepprg=grep\ -nH | |
161 | 3311 < Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command |
657 | 3312 works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like |
3313 |:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|. | |
41 | 3314 See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there |
7 | 3315 apply equally to 'grepprg'. |
3316 For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found, | |
3317 otherwise it's "grep -n". | |
3318 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
3319 security reasons. | |
3320 | |
3321 *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549* | |
3322 'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3323 ve:ver35-Cursor, | |
3324 o:hor50-Cursor, | |
3325 i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3326 r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3327 sm:block-Cursor | |
3328 -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175", | |
3329 for MS-DOS and Win32 console: | |
3330 "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15, | |
3331 r-cr:hor30,sm:block") | |
3332 global | |
3333 {not in Vi} | |
3334 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and | |
3335 for MS-DOS and Win32 console} | |
3336 This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different | |
10 | 3337 modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only |
7 | 3338 the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by |
3339 specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or | |
3340 horizontal cursor. | |
36 | 3341 For a console the 't_SI' and 't_EI' escape sequences are used. |
7 | 3342 |
10 | 3343 The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a |
7 | 3344 mode-list and an argument-list: |
3345 mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,.. | |
3346 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes: | |
3347 n Normal mode | |
3348 v Visual mode | |
3349 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', | |
3350 if not specified) | |
3351 o Operator-pending mode | |
3352 i Insert mode | |
3353 r Replace mode | |
3354 c Command-line Normal (append) mode | |
3355 ci Command-line Insert mode | |
3356 cr Command-line Replace mode | |
3357 sm showmatch in Insert mode | |
3358 a all modes | |
3359 The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments: | |
3360 hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height | |
3361 ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width | |
3362 block block cursor, fills the whole character | |
3363 [only one of the above three should be present] | |
3364 blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking* | |
3365 blinkon{N} | |
3366 blinkoff{N} | |
3367 blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before | |
3368 the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that | |
3369 the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the | |
3370 cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one | |
3371 of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The | |
3372 default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250". | |
3373 These numbers are used for a missing entry. This | |
3374 means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch | |
3375 blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only | |
3376 blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while | |
3377 executing a command. | |
3378 To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see | |
3379 |xterm-blink|. | |
3380 {group-name} | |
3381 a highlight group name, that sets the color and font | |
3382 for the cursor | |
3383 {group-name}/{group-name} | |
3384 Two highlight group names, the first is used when | |
3385 no language mappings are used, the other when they | |
3386 are. |language-mapping| | |
3387 | |
3388 Examples of parts: | |
3389 n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a | |
3390 block cursor with colors from the "nCursor" | |
3391 highlight group | |
3392 i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150 | |
3393 In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a | |
3394 30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the | |
3395 "iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit | |
3396 faster. | |
3397 | |
3398 The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for | |
3399 all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used | |
3400 to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off | |
3401 blinking: "a:blinkon0" | |
3402 | |
3403 Examples of cursor highlighting: > | |
3404 :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE | |
3405 :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg | |
3406 < | |
3407 *'guifont'* *'gfn'* | |
3408 *E235* *E596* *E610* *E611* | |
3409 'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "") | |
3410 global | |
3411 {not in Vi} | |
3412 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3413 This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim. | |
3414 In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When | |
3415 the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other | |
3416 font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas. | |
3417 The first valid font is used. | |
8 | 3418 |
170 | 3419 On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is |
3420 not empty, then 'guifont' is not used. | |
8 | 3421 |
7 | 3422 Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name |
3423 precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra | |
3424 backslash before a space and a backslash. See also | |
3425 |option-backslash|. For example: > | |
3426 :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas | |
8 | 3427 < will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it |
7 | 3428 will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead. |
8 | 3429 |
3430 If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting. | |
3431 If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource | |
3432 settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it | |
3433 will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in | |
3434 the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim | |
3435 will try to find the related bold and italic fonts. | |
3436 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3437 For Win32, GTK, Motif, Mac OS and Photon: > |
8 | 3438 :set guifont=* |
3439 < will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want. | |
3440 | |
3441 The font name depends on the GUI used. See |setting-guifont| for a | |
3442 way to set 'guifont' for various systems. | |
3443 | |
7 | 3444 For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: > |
3445 :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3446 < That's all. XLFDs are not used. For Chinese this is reported to work |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3447 well: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3448 if has("gui_gtk2") |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3449 set guifont=Bitstream\ Vera\ Sans\ Mono\ 12,Fixed\ 12 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3450 set guifontwide=Microsoft\ Yahei\ 12,WenQuanYi\ Zen\ Hei\ 12 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3451 endif |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3452 < |
170 | 3453 For Mac OSX you can use something like this: > |
3454 :set guifont=Monaco:h10 | |
853 | 3455 < Also see 'macatsui', it can help fix display problems. |
3456 *E236* | |
7 | 3457 Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same |
8 | 3458 width). An exception is GTK 2: all fonts are accepted, but |
3459 mono-spaced fonts look best. | |
3460 | |
7 | 3461 To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel" |
3462 program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts. | |
8 | 3463 |
7 | 3464 For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245* |
3465 - takes these options in the font name: | |
3466 hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point) | |
3467 wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point) | |
3468 b - bold | |
3469 i - italic | |
3470 u - underline | |
3471 s - strikeout | |
233 | 3472 cXX - character set XX. Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC, |
7 | 3473 BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK, |
3474 HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS, | |
3475 SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC. | |
22 | 3476 Normally you would use "cDEFAULT". |
7 | 3477 |
3478 Use a ':' to separate the options. | |
3479 - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use | |
3480 backslashes to escape the spaces. | |
3481 - Examples: > | |
3482 :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN | |
3483 :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5 | |
3484 < See also |font-sizes|. | |
3485 | |
3486 *'guifontset'* *'gfs'* | |
3487 *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598* | |
3488 'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "") | |
3489 global | |
3490 {not in Vi} | |
3491 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and | |
3492 with the |+xfontset| feature} | |
3493 {not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI} | |
3494 When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first | |
3495 one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See | |
3496 |xfontset|. | |
3497 Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as | |
3498 a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the | |
3499 |:highlight| command. | |
3500 The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the | |
3501 character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting | |
3502 'guifontset' will fail. | |
3503 Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont' | |
3504 the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be | |
3505 used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name, | |
3506 including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative | |
3507 fontset names. | |
3508 This example works on many X11 systems: > | |
3509 :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-* | |
3510 < | |
3511 *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534* | |
3512 'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "") | |
3513 global | |
3514 {not in Vi} | |
3515 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3516 When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used | |
3517 for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is | |
3518 used. | |
3519 Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one | |
3520 specified with 'guifont' and the same height. | |
3521 | |
3522 All GUI versions but GTK+ 2: | |
3523 | |
3524 'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and | |
3525 'guifontset' is empty or invalid. | |
3526 When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and | |
3527 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching | |
3528 double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it. | |
3529 | |
3530 GTK+ 2 GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk2* | |
3531 | |
3532 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width | |
3533 characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8". | |
3534 Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide' | |
10 | 3535 automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the |
7 | 3536 font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need |
3537 to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice | |
3538 made by Pango/Xft. | |
3539 | |
3540 *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'* | |
3541 'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50) | |
3542 global | |
3543 {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI} | |
3544 The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting | |
3545 the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started, | |
3546 e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will | |
10 | 3547 be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel |
7 | 3548 lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the |
3549 screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the | |
3550 screen. | |
3551 | |
3552 *'guioptions'* *'go'* | |
3553 'guioptions' 'go' string (default "gmrLtT" (MS-Windows), | |
233 | 3554 "agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena)) |
7 | 3555 global |
3556 {not in Vi} | |
3557 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
8 | 3558 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a |
7 | 3559 sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the |
3560 GUI should be used. | |
3561 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
3562 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
3563 | |
3564 Valid letters are as follows: | |
1152 | 3565 *guioptions_a* *'go-a'* |
7 | 3566 'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started, |
3567 or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of | |
3568 the windowing system's global selection. This means that the | |
3569 Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other | |
3570 applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode | |
3571 ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an | |
3572 application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text | |
3573 is automatically yanked into the "* selection register. | |
3574 Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other | |
3575 applications after the VISUAL mode has ended. | |
3576 If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the | |
3577 windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to | |
3578 by a yank or delete operation for the "* register. | |
3579 The same applies to the modeless selection. | |
1152 | 3580 *'go-A'* |
10 | 3581 'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only |
7 | 3582 applies to the modeless selection. |
3583 | |
3584 'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~ | |
3585 "" - - | |
3586 "a" yes yes | |
3587 "A" - yes | |
3588 "aA" yes yes | |
3589 | |
1152 | 3590 *'go-c'* |
7 | 3591 'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple |
3592 choices. | |
1152 | 3593 *'go-e'* |
697 | 3594 'e' Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'. |
688 | 3595 'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels. |
3596 When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used. | |
857 | 3597 The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently |
1621 | 3598 GTK, Motif, Mac OS/X and MS-Windows. |
1152 | 3599 *'go-f'* |
7 | 3600 'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell |
3601 where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the | |
3602 editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you | |
3603 can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the | |
3604 foreground. |gui-fork| | |
3605 Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have | |
819 | 3606 happened already when the |gvimrc| file is read. |
1152 | 3607 *'go-i'* |
7 | 3608 'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper |
3609 corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of | |
3610 limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|. | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3611 *'go-m'* |
7 | 3612 'm' Menu bar is present. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3613 *'go-M'* |
10 | 3614 'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note |
7 | 3615 that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before |
819 | 3616 switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc| |
7 | 3617 file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the |
3618 ":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too). | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3619 *'go-g'* |
7 | 3620 'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If |
3621 'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all. | |
3622 Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items. | |
1152 | 3623 *'go-t'* |
7 | 3624 't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32, |
3625 GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI. | |
1152 | 3626 *'go-T'* |
236 | 3627 'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, Photon |
856 | 3628 and Athena GUIs. |
1152 | 3629 *'go-r'* |
7 | 3630 'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3631 *'go-R'* |
7 | 3632 'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically |
3633 split window. | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3634 *'go-l'* |
7 | 3635 'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3636 *'go-L'* |
7 | 3637 'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically |
3638 split window. | |
1152 | 3639 *'go-b'* |
7 | 3640 'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on |
3641 the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h' | |
3642 flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll| | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3643 *'go-h'* |
7 | 3644 'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor |
3645 line. Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll| | |
3646 | |
3647 And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if | |
3648 you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information. | |
3649 | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3650 *'go-v'* |
7 | 3651 'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included, |
3652 a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a | |
3653 vertical layout is used anyway. | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3654 *'go-p'* |
7 | 3655 'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some |
3656 window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at | |
3657 the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done | |
819 | 3658 before starting the GUI. Set it in your |gvimrc|. Adding or |
7 | 3659 removing it after the GUI has started has no effect. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3660 *'go-F'* |
10 | 3661 'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|. |
7 | 3662 |
1152 | 3663 |
7 | 3664 *'guipty'* *'noguipty'* |
3665 'guipty' boolean (default on) | |
3666 global | |
3667 {not in Vi} | |
3668 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3669 Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for | |
3670 I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|. | |
3671 | |
688 | 3672 *'guitablabel'* *'gtl'* |
3673 'guitablabel' 'gtl' string (default empty) | |
3674 global | |
3675 {not in Vi} | |
692 | 3676 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3677 with the |+windows| feature} |
688 | 3678 When nonempty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab |
857 | 3679 pages line. When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a |
3680 default label. See |setting-guitablabel| for more info. | |
688 | 3681 |
692 | 3682 The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. |
839 | 3683 'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below. |
692 | 3684 |
688 | 3685 Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed. 'e' must be |
3686 present in 'guioptions'. For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is | |
3687 used. | |
3688 | |
839 | 3689 *'guitabtooltip'* *'gtt'* |
3690 'guitabtooltip' 'gtt' string (default empty) | |
3691 global | |
3692 {not in Vi} | |
3693 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3694 with the |+windows| feature} |
839 | 3695 When nonempty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab |
3696 pages line. When empty Vim will use a default tooltip. | |
3697 This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3698 You can include a line break. Simplest method is to use |:let|: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3699 :let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two" |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3700 < |
839 | 3701 |
7 | 3702 *'helpfile'* *'hf'* |
3703 'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt" | |
3704 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt") | |
3705 global | |
3706 {not in Vi} | |
3707 Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be | |
3708 placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories | |
3709 in 'runtimepath' will be used. | |
3710 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example: | |
3711 "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also | |
10 | 3712 tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including |
7 | 3713 spaces and backslashes. |
3714 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
3715 security reasons. | |
3716 | |
3717 *'helpheight'* *'hh'* | |
3718 'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20) | |
3719 global | |
3720 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3721 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 3722 feature} |
3723 Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the | |
3724 ":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the | |
3725 current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other | |
3726 windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is | |
3727 set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable. | |
3728 | |
3729 *'helplang'* *'hlg'* | |
3730 'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty) | |
3731 global | |
3732 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang| | |
3733 feature} | |
3734 {not in Vi} | |
3735 Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language | |
3736 for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always | |
3737 be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over | |
3738 another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that | |
3739 language and not in the English help. | |
3740 Example: > | |
3741 :set helplang=de,it | |
3742 < This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help | |
3743 files. | |
3744 When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will | |
3745 try to find the tag in the current language before using this option. | |
3746 See |help-translated|. | |
3747 | |
3748 *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'* | |
3749 'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off) | |
3750 global | |
3751 {not in Vi} | |
3752 When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a | |
3753 buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still | |
3754 displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course. | |
3755 The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer | |
3756 hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is | |
3757 modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!' | |
10 | 3758 flag was used. See also |windows.txt|. |
12 | 3759 To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option. |
7 | 3760 This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|. |
3761 WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers. | |
3762 Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!". | |
3763 | |
3764 *'highlight'* *'hl'* | |
3765 'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string): | |
3766 "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory, | |
3767 e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg, | |
3768 M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question, | |
819 | 3769 s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit, |
7 | 3770 t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu, |
3771 f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd, | |
3772 C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText, | |
386 | 3773 >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap, |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
3774 R:SpellRare,L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal, |
540 | 3775 +:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel, |
3776 x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb") | |
7 | 3777 global |
3778 {not in Vi} | |
3779 This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various | |
3780 occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The | |
3781 first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to | |
10 | 3782 use for that occasion. The occasions are: |
7 | 3783 |hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map" |
3784 |hl-NonText| @ '~' and '@' at the end of the window and | |
3785 characters from 'showbreak' | |
3786 |hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special | |
3787 things in listings | |
3788 |hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages | |
3789 h (obsolete, ignored) | |
3790 |hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting | |
3791 |hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch') | |
3792 |hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt| | |
3793 |hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --") | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3794 |hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3795 when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set. |
7 | 3796 |hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions |
3797 |hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line| | |
3798 |hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows | |
3799 |hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. | |
3800 |hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows | |
3801 |hl-Visual| v Visual mode | |
3802 |hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the | |
3803 Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and | |
3804 |xterm-clipboard|. | |
3805 |hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages | |
3806 |hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu' | |
3807 |hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds | |
3808 |hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn' | |
386 | 3809 |hl-DiffAdd| A added line in diff mode |
3810 |hl-DiffChange| C changed line in diff mode | |
3811 |hl-DiffDelete| D deleted line in diff mode | |
3812 |hl-DiffText| T inserted text in diff mode | |
7 | 3813 |hl-SignColumn| > column used for |signs| |
221 | 3814 |hl-SpellBad| B misspelled word |spell| |
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2324
diff
changeset
|
3815 |hl-SpellCap| P word that should start with capital |spell| |
221 | 3816 |hl-SpellRare| R rare word |spell| |
3817 |hl-SpellLocal| L word from other region |spell| | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
3818 |hl-Conceal| - the placeholders used for concealed characters |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
3819 (see 'conceallevel') |
540 | 3820 |hl-Pmenu| + popup menu normal line |
3821 |hl-PmenuSel| = popup menu normal line | |
3822 |hl-PmenuSbar| x popup menu scrollbar | |
3823 |hl-PmenuThumb| X popup menu scrollbar thumb | |
7 | 3824 |
3825 The display modes are: | |
3826 r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me") | |
3827 i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR") | |
3828 b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me") | |
3829 s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se") | |
3830 u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue") | |
205 | 3831 c undercurl (termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce") |
7 | 3832 n no highlighting |
3833 - no highlighting | |
3834 : use a highlight group | |
3835 The default is used for occasions that are not included. | |
3836 If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors| | |
3837 for an example. | |
3838 When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of | |
3839 a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type | |
3840 of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to | |
3841 define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion. | |
3842 See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups. | |
3843 | |
3844 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'* | |
3845 'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off) | |
3846 global | |
3847 {not in Vi} | |
3848 {not available when compiled without the | |
3849 |+extra_search| feature} | |
3850 When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches. | |
3851 The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the | |
3852 'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by | |
3853 default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets | |
3854 are not applied. | |
3855 See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|. | |
3856 When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it | |
3857 off with |:nohlsearch|. As soon as you use a search command, the | |
3858 highlighting comes back. | |
1621 | 3859 'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches. |
7 | 3860 When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to |
3861 highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the | |
10 | 3862 search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first |
7 | 3863 line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not |
819 | 3864 drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line. |
7 | 3865 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
3866 | |
3867 *'history'* *'hi'* | |
3868 'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 20, Vi default: 0) | |
3869 global | |
3870 {not in Vi} | |
3871 A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns | |
3872 are remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in | |
3873 each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|). | |
3874 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
3875 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
3876 | |
3877 *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'* | |
3878 'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off) | |
3879 global | |
3880 {not in Vi} | |
3881 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
3882 feature} | |
3883 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set. | |
3884 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to | |
3885 toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|. | |
3886 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
3887 | |
3888 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'* | |
3889 'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off) | |
3890 global | |
3891 {not in Vi} | |
3892 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
3893 feature} | |
3894 When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on. | |
3895 This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard. | |
3896 See |rileft.txt|. | |
3897 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
3898 | |
3899 *'icon'* *'noicon'* | |
3900 'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) | |
3901 global | |
3902 {not in Vi} | |
3903 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
3904 feature} | |
3905 When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of | |
3906 'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file | |
3907 currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used. | |
3908 Overridden by the 'iconstring' option. | |
3909 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently | |
3910 only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are | |
3911 Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the | |
3912 builtin termcap). | |
3913 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be | |
233 | 3914 restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on |
7 | 3915 X11. |
3916 | |
3917 *'iconstring'* | |
3918 'iconstring' string (default "") | |
3919 global | |
3920 {not in Vi} | |
3921 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
3922 feature} | |
3923 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of | |
3924 the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on. | |
3925 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text | |
3926 (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option). | |
3927 Does not work for MS Windows. | |
3928 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be | |
3929 restored if possible |X11|. | |
3930 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be | |
10 | 3931 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See |
7 | 3932 'titlestring' for example settings. |
3933 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} | |
3934 | |
3935 *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'* | |
3936 'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off) | |
3937 global | |
3938 Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags | |
3939 file. | |
3940 Also see 'smartcase'. | |
3941 Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see | |
3942 |/ignorecase|. | |
3943 | |
3944 *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'* | |
3945 'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "") | |
3946 global | |
3947 {not in Vi} | |
3948 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and | |
2209
d0ddf7ba1630
Included the patch to support netbeans in a terminal.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2207
diff
changeset
|
3949 |+GUI_GTK|} *E599* |
7 | 3950 Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for |
3951 activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control | |
3952 IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'. | |
3953 You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option | |
3954 tells Vim what the key is. | |
3955 Format: | |
3956 [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING | |
3957 | |
3958 These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored): | |
3959 S Shift key | |
3960 L Lock key | |
3961 C Control key | |
3962 1 Mod1 key | |
3963 2 Mod2 key | |
3964 3 Mod3 key | |
3965 4 Mod4 key | |
3966 5 Mod5 key | |
3967 Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are | |
3968 both shift+ctrl+space. | |
3969 See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING. | |
3970 | |
3971 Example: > | |
3972 :set imactivatekey=S-space | |
3973 < "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 + | |
3974 canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean). | |
3975 | |
3976 *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'* | |
3977 'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off) | |
3978 global | |
3979 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3980 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|, |
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3981 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| features} |
7 | 3982 When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command |
3983 line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that). | |
3984 Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering | |
3985 English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented | |
3986 characters with dead keys. | |
3987 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3988 *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'noimdisable'* *'noimd'* |
7 | 3989 'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI)) |
3990 global | |
3991 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3992 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|, |
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3993 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| features} |
7 | 3994 When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable |
3995 the IM when it doesn't work properly. | |
3996 Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This | |
3997 may change in later releases. | |
3998 | |
3999 *'iminsert'* *'imi'* | |
4000 'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported) | |
4001 local to buffer | |
4002 {not in Vi} | |
4003 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in | |
4004 Insert mode. Valid values: | |
4005 0 :lmap is off and IM is off | |
4006 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off | |
4007 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON | |
4008 2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim| | |
4009 or |global-ime|. | |
4010 To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc> | |
4011 this can be used: > | |
4012 :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR> | |
4013 < This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert | |
4014 mode. | |
4015 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode | |
4016 |i_CTRL-^|. | |
4017 The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name. | |
4018 It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f". | |
4019 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM | |
4020 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. | |
4021 | |
4022 *'imsearch'* *'ims'* | |
4023 'imsearch' 'ims' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported) | |
4024 local to buffer | |
4025 {not in Vi} | |
4026 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when | |
4027 entering a search pattern. Valid values: | |
4028 -1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like | |
4029 'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern | |
4030 0 :lmap is off and IM is off | |
4031 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off | |
4032 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON | |
4033 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode | |
4034 |c_CTRL-^|. | |
4035 The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap' | |
4036 option to a valid keymap name. | |
4037 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM | |
4038 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. | |
4039 | |
4040 *'include'* *'inc'* | |
4041 'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include") | |
4042 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
4043 {not in Vi} | |
4044 {not available when compiled without the | |
4045 |+find_in_path| feature} | |
10 | 4046 Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search |
7 | 4047 pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default |
4048 value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i", | |
532 | 4049 "]I", "[d", etc. |
4050 Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that | |
534 | 4051 comes after the matched pattern. But if "\zs" appears in the pattern |
4052 then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it | |
4053 appears, is used as the file name. Use this to include characters | |
4054 that are not in 'isfname', such as a space. You can then use | |
4055 'includeexpr' to process the matched text. | |
532 | 4056 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
7 | 4057 |
4058 *'includeexpr'* *'inex'* | |
4059 'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "") | |
4060 local to buffer | |
4061 {not in Vi} | |
4062 {not available when compiled without the | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4063 |+find_in_path| or |+eval| features} |
7 | 4064 Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include' |
10 | 4065 option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: > |
7 | 4066 :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g') |
4067 < The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected. | |
634 | 4068 |
7 | 4069 Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be |
10 | 4070 found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement. |
7 | 4071 Also used for |<cfile>|. |
4072 | |
634 | 4073 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
4074 |sandbox-option|. | |
4075 | |
4076 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
4077 evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|. | |
4078 | |
7 | 4079 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'* |
4080 'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off) | |
4081 global | |
4082 {not in Vi} | |
4083 {not available when compiled without the | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4084 |+extra_search| features} |
17 | 4085 While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed |
4086 so far, matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the pattern | |
4087 is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will be updated | |
4088 often, this is only useful on fast terminals. | |
4089 Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its | |
4090 original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>. You | |
4091 still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the | |
4092 cursor to the match. | |
1521 | 4093 When compiled with the |+reltime| feature Vim only searches for about |
4094 half a second. With a complicated pattern and/or a lot of text the | |
4095 match may not be found. This is to avoid that Vim hangs while you | |
4096 are typing the pattern. | |
17 | 4097 The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'. |
4098 See also: 'hlsearch'. | |
772 | 4099 CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match |
2302
488be8cbe19c
Make CTRL-L in command line mode respect 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'. (Martin
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
4100 to the command line. If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the |
488be8cbe19c
Make CTRL-L in command line mode respect 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'. (Martin
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
4101 command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is |
488be8cbe19c
Make CTRL-L in command line mode respect 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'. (Martin
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
4102 converted to lowercase. |
772 | 4103 CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current |
4104 match, excluding the characters that were already typed. | |
7 | 4105 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
4106 | |
4107 *'indentexpr'* *'inde'* | |
4108 'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "") | |
4109 local to buffer | |
4110 {not in Vi} | |
4111 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
4112 or |+eval| features} | |
4113 Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line. | |
4114 It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and | |
4115 in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option. | |
4116 When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and | |
2833 | 4117 'smartindent' indenting. When 'lisp' is set, this option is |
4118 overridden by the Lisp indentation algorithm. | |
7 | 4119 When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting. |
4120 The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for | |
534 | 4121 which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also in this line |
7 | 4122 when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around). |
4123 The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It | |
4124 can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is | |
4125 used for the indent). | |
4126 Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()| | |
4127 and |lispindent()|. | |
4128 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must | |
4129 not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the | |
4130 cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved. | |
4131 Normally this option would be set to call a function: > | |
4132 :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent() | |
4133 < Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains | |
4134 "msg". | |
634 | 4135 See |indent-expression|. |
7 | 4136 NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set. |
4137 | |
634 | 4138 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
4139 |sandbox-option|. | |
4140 | |
4141 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
4142 evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|. | |
4143 | |
4144 | |
7 | 4145 *'indentkeys'* *'indk'* |
4146 'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") | |
4147 local to buffer | |
4148 {not in Vi} | |
4149 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
4150 feature} | |
4151 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of | |
4152 the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty. | |
4153 The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|. | |
4154 See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|. | |
4155 | |
4156 *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'* | |
4157 'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off) | |
4158 local to buffer | |
4159 {not in Vi} | |
4160 When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and | |
1621 | 4161 'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending |
4162 on the typed text. If the typed text contains a lowercase letter | |
4163 where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made | |
4164 lowercase. If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match | |
4165 has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter, | |
4166 and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase. | |
4167 With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is. | |
7 | 4168 |
4169 *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'* | |
4170 'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off) | |
4171 global | |
4172 {not in Vi} | |
4173 Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful | |
4174 if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|. | |
4175 These Insert mode commands will be useful: | |
4176 - Use the cursor keys to move around. | |
4177 - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|). When | |
4178 this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off. | |
4179 Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished. | |
4180 - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use | |
477 | 4181 <Esc> to get back to Insert mode. Note that CTRL-L moves the cursor |
4182 left, like <Esc> does when 'insertmode' isn't set. |i_CTRL-L| | |
7 | 4183 |
4184 These items change when 'insertmode' is set: | |
4185 - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode. | |
4186 - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps. | |
4187 - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode. | |
4188 - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted. | |
4189 - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z* | |
4190 However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like | |
4191 'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same | |
4192 mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set. | |
4193 When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used. | |
4194 | |
4195 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4196 | |
4197 *'isfname'* *'isf'* | |
4198 'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: | |
4199 "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,=" | |
4200 for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:" | |
4201 for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~" | |
4202 for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=" | |
4203 otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=") | |
4204 global | |
4205 {not in Vi} | |
4206 The characters specified by this option are included in file names and | |
4207 path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in | |
10 | 4208 the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|. |
7 | 4209 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the |
4210 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. | |
4211 For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well. | |
1621 | 4212 Think twice before adding white space to this option. Although a |
4213 space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim | |
4214 doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion. | |
4215 It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'. | |
7 | 4216 |
4217 Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to | |
4218 do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit | |
4219 tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special | |
4220 characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file | |
4221 name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The | |
4222 '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for | |
4223 cmd.exe. | |
4224 | |
4225 The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas. | |
10 | 4226 Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two |
4227 character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a | |
7 | 4228 decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does |
4229 not work for digits). Example: | |
4230 "_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range | |
4231 128 to 140 and '#' to 43) | |
4232 If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range | |
4233 will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left | |
4234 to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is | |
4235 included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the | |
4236 option or the end of a range. Example: | |
4237 "^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^') | |
4238 If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE | |
4239 are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z, | |
4240 plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples: | |
4241 "@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower | |
1621 | 4242 case ASCII letters. |
7 | 4243 "a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character. |
4244 A comma can be included by using it where a character number is | |
4245 expected. Example: | |
4246 "48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore. | |
4247 A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example: | |
4248 " -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding | |
4249 comma, plus <Tab>. | |
4250 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4251 | |
4252 *'isident'* *'isi'* | |
4253 'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: | |
4254 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" | |
4255 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255") | |
4256 global | |
4257 {not in Vi} | |
4258 The characters given by this option are included in identifiers. | |
4259 Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a | |
4260 match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a | |
233 | 4261 |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this |
7 | 4262 option. |
4263 Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding | |
10 | 4264 environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to |
7 | 4265 expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead. |
4266 | |
4267 *'iskeyword'* *'isk'* | |
4268 'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32: | |
4269 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" | |
4270 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255" | |
4271 Vi default: "@,48-57,_") | |
4272 local to buffer | |
4273 {not in Vi} | |
4274 Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands: | |
10 | 4275 "w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See |
7 | 4276 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C |
4277 programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>". | |
4278 For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except | |
4279 '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that | |
4280 command). | |
4281 When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included. | |
4282 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
4283 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4284 | |
4285 *'isprint'* *'isp'* | |
4286 'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh: | |
4287 "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255") | |
4288 global | |
4289 {not in Vi} | |
4290 The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the | |
4291 screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from | |
4292 space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly, | |
4293 even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See | |
4294 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. | |
4295 | |
4296 Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters: | |
4297 0 - 31 "^@" - "^_" | |
4298 32 - 126 always single characters | |
4299 127 "^?" | |
4300 128 - 159 "~@" - "~_" | |
4301 160 - 254 "| " - "|~" | |
4302 255 "~?" | |
4303 When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are | |
4304 displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte. | |
4305 When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are | |
4306 displayed as <xx>. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4307 The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4308 |hl-SpecialKey| |
7 | 4309 |
4310 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the | |
4311 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character | |
4312 is printable but it is not available in the current font, a | |
4313 replacement character will be shown. | |
4314 Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>. | |
4315 There is no option to specify these characters. | |
4316 | |
4317 *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'* | |
4318 'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on) | |
4319 global | |
4320 {not in Vi} | |
4321 Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command. | |
4322 When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'. | |
4323 Otherwise only one space is inserted. | |
4324 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. | |
4325 | |
4326 *'key'* | |
4327 'key' string (default "") | |
4328 local to buffer | |
4329 {not in Vi} | |
2283
7e1bd501306d
Mainly documentation updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2265
diff
changeset
|
4330 {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| |
7e1bd501306d
Mainly documentation updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2265
diff
changeset
|
4331 feature} |
7 | 4332 The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer. |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
4333 See |encryption| and 'cryptmethod'. |
7 | 4334 Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed |
4335 key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: > | |
4336 :set key= | |
4337 < It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or | |
4338 "echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't | |
4339 know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it, | |
4340 be careful not to make a typing error! | |
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
4341 You can use "&key" in an expression to detect whether encryption is |
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
4342 enabled. When 'key' is set it returns "*****" (five stars). |
7 | 4343 |
4344 *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544* | |
4345 'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "") | |
4346 local to buffer | |
4347 {not in Vi} | |
4348 {only available when compiled with the |+keymap| | |
4349 feature} | |
4350 Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|. | |
4351 Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of | |
4352 setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective. | |
4353 'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1 | |
36 | 4354 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 4355 |
4356 *'keymodel'* *'km'* | |
4357 'keymodel' 'km' string (default "") | |
4358 global | |
4359 {not in Vi} | |
4360 List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys | |
4361 can do. These values can be used: | |
4362 startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either | |
4363 Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being | |
4364 present in 'selectmode'). | |
4365 stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection. | |
4366 Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>, | |
4367 <PageUp> and <PageDown>. | |
4368 The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
4369 | |
4370 *'keywordprg'* *'kp'* | |
4371 'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help", | |
4372 OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help") | |
4373 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
4374 {not in Vi} | |
4375 Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are | |
4376 expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal | |
4377 help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty | |
4378 value did this, which is now deprecated.) | |
4379 When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the | |
4380 "K" command to a section number. Also for "man -s", in which case the | |
4381 "-s" is removed when there is no count. | |
4382 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4383 Example: > | |
4384 :set keywordprg=man\ -s | |
4385 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4386 security reasons. | |
4387 | |
4388 *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358* | |
4389 'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "") | |
4390 global | |
4391 {not in Vi} | |
4392 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| | |
4393 feature} | |
4394 This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language | |
10 | 4395 mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are |
7 | 4396 inserted directly. When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes |
4397 care of translating these special characters to the original meaning | |
4398 of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to | |
4399 be able to execute Normal mode commands. | |
4400 This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are | |
4401 mapped in Insert mode. | |
4402 | |
699 | 4403 Example (for Greek, in UTF-8): *greek* > |
4404 :set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz | |
7 | 4405 < Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): > |
4406 :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ | |
4407 < | |
4408 The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each | |
4409 part can be in one of two forms: | |
4410 1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately | |
4411 followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC". | |
4412 2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to" | |
4413 characters. Example: "abc;ABC" | |
4414 Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE" | |
4415 Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are | |
4416 ";", ',' and backslash itself. | |
4417 | |
4418 This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch | |
4419 back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will | |
4420 be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the | |
4421 langmap mappings) in the following cases: | |
4422 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings) | |
4423 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R | |
4424 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings | |
4425 Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by | |
4426 this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time | |
4427 allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings. | |
4428 Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time! | |
4429 | |
4430 *'langmenu'* *'lm'* | |
4431 'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "") | |
4432 global | |
4433 {not in Vi} | |
4434 {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and | |
4435 |+multi_lang| features} | |
4436 Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded | |
4437 from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': > | |
4438 "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim" | |
4439 < (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no | |
4440 matter what $LANG is set to: > | |
4441 :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1 | |
4442 < When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used. | |
36 | 4443 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 4444 If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use |
4445 the English menus: > | |
4446 :set langmenu=none | |
4447 < This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype | |
4448 detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting | |
4449 this option has no effect. But you could do this: > | |
4450 :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim | |
4451 :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1 | |
4452 :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim | |
4453 < Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself! | |
4454 | |
4455 *'laststatus'* *'ls'* | |
4456 'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1) | |
4457 global | |
4458 {not in Vi} | |
4459 The value of this option influences when the last window will have a | |
4460 status line: | |
4461 0: never | |
4462 1: only if there are at least two windows | |
4463 2: always | |
4464 The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several | |
4465 windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line| | |
4466 | |
4467 *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'* | |
4468 'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off) | |
4469 global | |
4470 {not in Vi} | |
4471 When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while | |
4472 executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been | |
10 | 4473 typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an |
7 | 4474 update use |:redraw|. |
4475 | |
4476 *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'* | |
4477 'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off) | |
4478 local to window | |
4479 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4480 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| |
7 | 4481 feature} |
4482 If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather | |
4483 than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike | |
4484 'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file, | |
4485 it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. The | |
4486 value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines. | |
4487 This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on. | |
4488 Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed | |
4489 with the right amount of white space. | |
4490 | |
4491 *'lines'* *E593* | |
4492 'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height) | |
4493 global | |
4494 Number of lines of the Vim window. | |
4495 Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the | |
161 | 4496 terminal initialization code. Also see |posix-screen-size|. |
7 | 4497 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this |
4498 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want | |
4499 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. | |
4500 Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can | |
4501 use this command to get the tallest window possible: > | |
4502 :set lines=999 | |
571 | 4503 < Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000. |
4504 If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option. | |
7 | 4505 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical |
4506 number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up. | |
4507 | |
4508 *'linespace'* *'lsp'* | |
4509 'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI) | |
4510 global | |
4511 {not in Vi} | |
4512 {only in the GUI} | |
4513 Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font | |
4514 uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other. | |
4515 When non-zero there is room for underlining. | |
180 | 4516 With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have |
4517 space for ascents and descents). Then it makes sense to set | |
4518 'linespace' to a negative value. This may cause display problems | |
4519 though! | |
7 | 4520 |
4521 *'lisp'* *'nolisp'* | |
4522 'lisp' boolean (default off) | |
4523 local to buffer | |
4524 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| | |
4525 feature} | |
4526 Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for | |
4527 the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with | |
4528 "cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p' | |
4529 flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or | |
4530 better. Also see 'lispwords'. | |
4531 The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the | |
4532 "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than | |
4533 calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty. | |
4534 This option is not used when 'paste' is set. | |
4535 {Vi: Does it a little bit differently} | |
4536 | |
4537 *'lispwords'* *'lw'* | |
4538 'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long) | |
4539 global | |
4540 {not in Vi} | |
4541 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| | |
4542 feature} | |
4543 Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting. | |
4544 |'lisp'| | |
4545 | |
4546 *'list'* *'nolist'* | |
4547 'list' boolean (default off) | |
4548 local to window | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4549 List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I is displayed, display $ after end of |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4550 line. Useful to see the difference between tabs and spaces and for |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4551 trailing blanks. Further changed by the 'listchars' option. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4552 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4553 The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4554 occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode. To get this cursor |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4555 position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4556 :set list lcs=tab\ \ |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4557 < |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4558 Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4559 or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for |
7 | 4560 changing the way tabs are displayed. |
4561 | |
4562 *'listchars'* *'lcs'* | |
4563 'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$") | |
4564 global | |
4565 {not in Vi} | |
2458 | 4566 Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command. It is a |
4567 comma separated list of string settings. | |
7 | 4568 eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When |
4569 omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the | |
4570 line. | |
1263 | 4571 tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a tab. The first |
7 | 4572 char is used once. The second char is repeated to |
1263 | 4573 fill the space that the tab normally occupies. |
4574 "tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as | |
4575 ">---". When omitted, a tab is show as ^I. | |
10 | 4576 trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted, |
7 | 4577 trailing spaces are blank. |
4578 extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is | |
4579 off and the line continues beyond the right of the | |
4580 screen. | |
4581 precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap' | |
4582 is off and there is text preceding the character | |
4583 visible in the first column. | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
4584 conceal:c Character to show in place of concealed text, when |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
4585 'conceallevel' is set to 1. |
13 | 4586 nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space (character |
856 | 4587 0xA0, 160). Left blank when omitted. |
7 | 4588 |
10 | 4589 The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can |
7 | 4590 be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable |
819 | 4591 characters are allowed. All characters must be single width. |
7 | 4592 |
4593 Examples: > | |
4594 :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:- | |
12 | 4595 :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:% |
7 | 4596 :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:< |
4597 < The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and | |
12 | 4598 "precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "tab" and "trail". |
1152 | 4599 |hl-NonText| |hl-SpecialKey| |
7 | 4600 |
4601 *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'* | |
4602 'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on) | |
4603 global | |
4604 {not in Vi} | |
4605 When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|. | |
4606 This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading | |
4607 of plugins. | |
4608 Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments | |
4609 reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin| | |
4610 | |
842 | 4611 *'macatsui'* *'nomacatsui'* |
4612 'macatsui' boolean (default on) | |
4613 global | |
4614 {only available in Mac GUI version} | |
4615 This is a workaround for when drawing doesn't work properly. When set | |
4616 and compiled with multi-byte support ATSUI text drawing is used. When | |
4617 not set ATSUI text drawing is not used. Switch this option off when | |
4618 you experience drawing problems. In a future version the problems may | |
4619 be solved and this option becomes obsolete. Therefore use this method | |
4620 to unset it: > | |
4621 if exists('&macatsui') | |
4622 set nomacatsui | |
4623 endif | |
1152 | 4624 < Another option to check if you have drawing problems is |
4625 'termencoding'. | |
4626 | |
7 | 4627 *'magic'* *'nomagic'* |
4628 'magic' boolean (default on) | |
4629 global | |
4630 Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns. | |
4631 See |pattern|. | |
4632 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep | |
4633 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with | |
4634 old Vi scripts. In any other situation write patterns that work when | |
20 | 4635 'magic' is on. Include "\M" when you want to |/\M|. |
7 | 4636 |
4637 *'makeef'* *'mef'* | |
4638 'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "") | |
4639 global | |
4640 {not in Vi} | |
4641 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
4642 feature} | |
4643 Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|) | |
4644 and the |:grep| command. | |
4645 When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used. | |
4646 When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name | |
4647 unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an | |
4648 existing file. | |
4649 NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that. | |
4650 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
4651 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4652 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4653 security reasons. | |
4654 | |
4655 *'makeprg'* *'mp'* | |
4656 'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS") | |
4657 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
4658 {not in Vi} | |
1152 | 4659 Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. |
4660 This option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded to | |
4661 the current and alternate file name. |:_%| |:_#| | |
4662 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| | |
4663 about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4664 Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for | |
4665 the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter called | |
4666 "myfilter" do it like this: > | |
7 | 4667 :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter |
4668 < The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify | |
4669 where the arguments will be included, for example: > | |
4670 :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*} | |
4671 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4672 security reasons. | |
4673 | |
4674 *'matchpairs'* *'mps'* | |
4675 'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]") | |
4676 local to buffer | |
4677 {not in Vi} | |
4678 Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the | |
1152 | 4679 other. Currently only single byte character pairs are allowed, and |
4680 they must be different. The characters must be separated by a colon. | |
4681 The pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and | |
4682 '>' (HTML): > | |
7 | 4683 :set mps+=<:> |
4684 | |
4685 < A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an | |
4686 assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: > | |
4687 :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:; | |
4688 | |
4689 < For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in | |
4690 the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help| | |
4691 | |
4692 *'matchtime'* *'mat'* | |
4693 'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5) | |
4694 global | |
4695 {not in Vi}{in Nvi} | |
4696 Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is | |
4697 set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that | |
4698 set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi. | |
4699 | |
714 | 4700 *'maxcombine'* *'mco'* |
4701 'maxcombine' 'mco' number (default 2) | |
4702 global | |
4703 {not in Vi} | |
4704 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
4705 feature} | |
4706 The maximum number of combining characters supported for displaying. | |
4707 Only used when 'encoding' is "utf-8". | |
4708 The default is OK for most languages. Hebrew may require 4. | |
4709 Maximum value is 6. | |
4710 Even when this option is set to 2 you can still edit text with more | |
4711 combining characters, you just can't see them. Use |g8| or |ga|. | |
4712 See |mbyte-combining|. | |
4713 | |
7 | 4714 *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'* |
4715 'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100) | |
4716 global | |
4717 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4718 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
1152 | 4719 feature} |
7 | 4720 Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally |
4721 catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with | |
4722 more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use | |
4723 more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted. | |
4724 See also |:function|. | |
4725 | |
4726 *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223* | |
4727 'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000) | |
4728 global | |
4729 {not in Vi} | |
4730 Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a | |
4731 character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like | |
4732 ":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg", | |
4733 because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also | |
4734 |key-mapping|. | |
4735 | |
4736 *'maxmem'* *'mm'* | |
4737 'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system | |
4738 dependent) or half the amount of memory | |
4739 available) | |
4740 global | |
4741 {not in Vi} | |
4742 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this | |
4743 limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4744 other memory to be freed. The maximum usable value is about 2000000. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4745 Use this to work without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'. |
7 | 4746 |
189 | 4747 *'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'* |
4748 'maxmempattern' 'mmp' number (default 1000) | |
4749 global | |
4750 {not in Vi} | |
4751 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4752 The maximum value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. |
189 | 4753 *E363* |
1152 | 4754 When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly |
4755 behaves like CTRL-C was typed. | |
189 | 4756 Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very |
4757 inefficient or too complex. This may already happen with the pattern | |
4758 "\(.\)*" on a very long line. ".*" works much better. | |
4759 Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit. | |
4760 | |
7 | 4761 *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'* |
4762 'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system | |
4763 dependent) or half the amount of memory | |
4764 available) | |
4765 global | |
4766 {not in Vi} | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4767 Maximum amount of memory in Kbyte to use for all buffers together. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4768 The maximum usable value is about 2000000 (2 Gbyte). Use this to work |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4769 without a limit. On 64 bit machines higher values might work. But |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4770 hey, do you really need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing? |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4771 Also see 'maxmem'. |
7 | 4772 |
4773 *'menuitems'* *'mis'* | |
4774 'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25) | |
4775 global | |
4776 {not in Vi} | |
4777 {not available when compiled without the |+menu| | |
4778 feature} | |
4779 Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are | |
4780 generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this | |
4781 option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first. | |
4782 | |
484 | 4783 *'mkspellmem'* *'msm'* |
4784 'mkspellmem' 'msm' string (default "460000,2000,500") | |
4785 global | |
4786 {not in Vi} | |
4787 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
4788 feature} | |
4789 Parameters for |:mkspell|. This tunes when to start compressing the | |
4790 word tree. Compression can be slow when there are many words, but | |
4791 it's needed to avoid running out of memory. The amount of memory used | |
4792 per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why | |
4793 this tuning is complicated. | |
4794 | |
4795 There are three numbers, separated by commas: | |
4796 {start},{inc},{added} | |
4797 | |
4798 For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory. {start} | |
4799 gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any | |
4800 compression is done. It should be a bit smaller than the amount of | |
4801 memory that is available to Vim. | |
4802 | |
4803 When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the | |
4804 amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another | |
4805 compression is done. A low number means compression is done after | |
4806 less words are added, which is slow. A high number means more memory | |
4807 will be allocated. | |
4808 | |
4809 After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before | |
4810 the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra | |
4811 amount of memory is needed. A low number means there is a smaller | |
4812 chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's | |
4813 slower. | |
4814 | |
4815 The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and | |
4816 Hungarian. The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte. If | |
4817 you have 1 Gbyte you could use: > | |
4818 :set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800 | |
4819 < If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some | |
4820 languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to. | |
4821 | |
7 | 4822 *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'* |
1111 | 4823 'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on (off for root), |
4824 Vi default: off) | |
7 | 4825 local to buffer |
4826 *'modelines'* *'mls'* | |
4827 'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5) | |
4828 global | |
4829 {not in Vi} | |
4830 If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is | |
4831 checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero | |
4832 no lines are checked. See |modeline|. | |
4833 NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
4834 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4835 | |
4836 *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'* | |
4837 'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on) | |
4838 local to buffer | |
4839 {not in Vi} *E21* | |
4840 When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and | |
4841 'fileencoding' options also can't be changed. | |
4842 Can be reset with the |-M| command line argument. | |
4843 | |
4844 *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'* | |
4845 'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off) | |
4846 local to buffer | |
4847 {not in Vi} | |
4848 When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set | |
4849 when: | |
4850 1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the | |
4851 |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the | |
4852 option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the | |
4853 buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from | |
4854 when it was written. | |
4855 2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original | |
4856 value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or | |
4857 written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original | |
4858 values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be | |
4859 reset. | |
4860 When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but | |
4861 will be ignored. | |
4862 | |
4863 *'more'* *'nomore'* | |
4864 'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
4865 global | |
4866 {not in Vi} | |
4867 When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get | |
4868 the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the | |
4869 listing continues until finished. | |
4870 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
4871 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4872 | |
4873 *'mouse'* *E538* | |
4874 'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32) | |
4875 global | |
4876 {not in Vi} | |
4877 Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals | |
1621 | 4878 (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, *BSD console with |
4879 sysmouse and Linux console with gpm). For using the mouse in the | |
4880 GUI, see |gui-mouse|. | |
7 | 4881 The mouse can be enabled for different modes: |
4882 n Normal mode | |
4883 v Visual mode | |
4884 i Insert mode | |
4885 c Command-line mode | |
4886 h all previous modes when editing a help file | |
4887 a all previous modes | |
4888 r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt | |
4889 Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: > | |
4890 :set mouse=a | |
4891 < When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for | |
4892 modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor. | |
4893 | |
4894 See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|. | |
4895 | |
4896 Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the | |
10 | 4897 "* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of |
7 | 4898 the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed. |
4899 Also see the 'clipboard' option. | |
4900 | |
4901 *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'* | |
4902 'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off) | |
4903 global | |
4904 {not in Vi} | |
4905 {only works in the GUI} | |
4906 The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated. | |
4907 When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the | |
4908 mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the | |
4909 default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as | |
4910 a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally. | |
4911 | |
4912 *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'* | |
4913 'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on) | |
4914 global | |
4915 {not in Vi} | |
4916 {only works in the GUI} | |
4917 When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed. | |
4918 The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved. | |
4919 | |
4920 *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'* | |
4921 'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32) | |
4922 global | |
4923 {not in Vi} | |
4924 Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what | |
4925 the right mouse button is used for: | |
4926 extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works | |
4927 like in an xterm. | |
4928 popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left | |
4929 mouse button extends a selection. This works like | |
233 | 4930 with Microsoft Windows. |
7 | 4931 popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the |
4932 position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the | |
4933 selected operation will act upon the clicked object. | |
4934 If clicking inside a selection, that selection will | |
233 | 4935 be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move. This implies of |
7 | 4936 course, that right clicking outside a selection will |
4937 end Visual mode. | |
4938 Overview of what button does what for each model: | |
4939 mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~ | |
4940 left click place cursor place cursor | |
4941 left drag start selection start selection | |
4942 shift-left search word extend selection | |
4943 right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor) | |
4944 right drag extend selection - | |
4945 middle click paste paste | |
4946 | |
4947 In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu. | |
4948 You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|. | |
4949 | |
4950 Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings. | |
4951 See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless | |
4952 selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly). | |
4953 | |
4954 The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
4955 | |
4956 *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547* | |
4957 'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross, | |
233 | 4958 m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow") |
7 | 4959 global |
4960 {not in Vi} | |
4961 {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape| | |
4962 feature} | |
4963 This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in | |
4964 different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much | |
4965 like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list | |
4966 and an argument-list: | |
4967 mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,.. | |
4968 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations: | |
4969 In a normal window: ~ | |
4970 n Normal mode | |
4971 v Visual mode | |
4972 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', | |
4973 if not specified) | |
4974 o Operator-pending mode | |
4975 i Insert mode | |
4976 r Replace mode | |
4977 | |
4978 Others: ~ | |
4979 c appending to the command-line | |
4980 ci inserting in the command-line | |
4981 cr replacing in the command-line | |
4982 m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts | |
4983 ml idem, but cursor in the last line | |
4984 e any mode, pointer below last window | |
4985 s any mode, pointer on a status line | |
4986 sd any mode, while dragging a status line | |
4987 vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line | |
4988 vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line | |
4989 a everywhere | |
4990 | |
4991 The shape is one of the following: | |
4992 avail name looks like ~ | |
4993 w x arrow Normal mouse pointer | |
4994 w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!) | |
4995 w x beam I-beam | |
4996 w x updown up-down sizing arrows | |
4997 w x leftright left-right sizing arrows | |
4998 w x busy The system's usual busy pointer | |
4999 w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer | |
5000 x udsizing indicates up-down resizing | |
5001 x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing | |
5002 x crosshair like a big thin + | |
5003 x hand1 black hand | |
5004 x hand2 white hand | |
5005 x pencil what you write with | |
5006 x question big ? | |
5007 x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up | |
5008 w x up-arrow arrow pointing up | |
5009 x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h) | |
5010 | |
5011 The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32, | |
5012 x for X11. | |
5013 Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse | |
5014 pointer. | |
5015 | |
5016 Example: > | |
5017 :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no | |
5018 < will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and | |
5019 indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since | |
5020 clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.) | |
5021 | |
5022 *'mousetime'* *'mouset'* | |
5023 'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500) | |
5024 global | |
5025 {not in Vi} | |
5026 Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum | |
5027 time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be | |
5028 recognized as a multi click. | |
5029 | |
14 | 5030 *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'* |
5031 'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100) | |
5032 global | |
5033 {not in Vi} | |
5034 {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme| | |
5035 feature} | |
5036 The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads. | |
5037 Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling. | |
5038 | |
7 | 5039 *'nrformats'* *'nf'* |
5040 'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "octal,hex") | |
5041 local to buffer | |
5042 {not in Vi} | |
5043 This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the | |
5044 CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number | |
5045 respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands. | |
625 | 5046 alpha If included, single alphabetical characters will be |
7 | 5047 incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a |
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2298
diff
changeset
|
5048 letter index a), b), etc. *octal-number* |
625 | 5049 octal If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered |
7 | 5050 to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010". |
625 | 5051 hex If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be |
7 | 5052 considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on |
5053 "0x100" results in "0x0ff". | |
5054 Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always | |
5055 considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not | |
5056 recognized as octal or hex. | |
5057 | |
5058 *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'* | |
5059 'number' 'nu' boolean (default off) | |
5060 local to window | |
5061 Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is | |
5062 excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of | |
5063 line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set). | |
13 | 5064 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line |
5065 number. | |
7 | 5066 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' |
5067 characters are put before the number. | |
5068 See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number. | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5069 When setting this option, 'relativenumber' is reset. |
7 | 5070 |
13 | 5071 *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'* |
5072 'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8) | |
5073 local to window | |
14 | 5074 {not in Vi} |
5075 {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak| | |
5076 feature} | |
13 | 5077 Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5078 when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5079 with a line number. Since one space is always between the number and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5080 the text, there is one less character for the number itself. |
13 | 5081 The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5082 fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5083 rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber' |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5084 is set. Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line number |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5085 up to 999. When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be used. |
13 | 5086 The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10. |
5087 NOTE: 'numberwidth' is reset to 8 when 'compatible' is set. | |
5088 | |
523 | 5089 *'omnifunc'* *'ofu'* |
5090 'omnifunc' 'ofu' string (default: empty) | |
502 | 5091 local to buffer |
5092 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5093 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5094 or |+insert_expand| features} |
623 | 5095 This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni |
5096 completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O| | |
648 | 5097 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is |
5098 invoked and what it should return. | |
1004 | 5099 This option is usually set by a filetype plugin: |
859 | 5100 |:filetype-plugin-on| |
502 | 5101 |
5102 | |
1152 | 5103 *'opendevice'* *'odev'* *'noopendevice'* *'noodev'* |
1004 | 5104 'opendevice' 'odev' boolean (default off) |
5105 global | |
5106 {not in Vi} | |
5107 {only for MS-DOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} | |
5108 Enable reading and writing from devices. This may get Vim stuck on a | |
5109 device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O. Therefore | |
5110 it is off by default. | |
5111 Note that on MS-Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also | |
5112 result in editing a device. | |
5113 | |
5114 | |
593 | 5115 *'operatorfunc'* *'opfunc'* |
5116 'operatorfunc' 'opfunc' string (default: empty) | |
5117 global | |
5118 {not in Vi} | |
5119 This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator. | |
5120 See |:map-operator| for more info and an example. | |
5121 | |
5122 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5123 security reasons. | |
5124 | |
5125 | |
7 | 5126 *'osfiletype'* *'oft'* *E366* |
5127 'osfiletype' 'oft' string (RISC-OS default: "Text", | |
5128 others default: "") | |
5129 local to buffer | |
5130 {not in Vi} | |
5131 {only available when compiled with the |+osfiletype| | |
5132 feature} | |
5133 Some operating systems store extra information about files besides | |
5134 name, datestamp and permissions. This option contains the extra | |
5135 information, the nature of which will vary between systems. | |
5136 The value of this option is usually set when the file is loaded, and | |
1698 | 5137 is used to set the operating system file type when file is written. |
7 | 5138 It can affect the pattern matching of the automatic commands. |
5139 |autocmd-osfiletypes| | |
5140 | |
5141 *'paragraphs'* *'para'* | |
1564 | 5142 'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp") |
7 | 5143 global |
5144 Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs | |
5145 of two letters (see |object-motions|). | |
5146 | |
5147 *'paste'* *'nopaste'* | |
5148 'paste' boolean (default off) | |
5149 global | |
5150 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 5151 Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy |
5152 some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid | |
7 | 5153 unexpected effects. |
5154 Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim | |
10 | 5155 cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim |
7 | 5156 knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste' |
5157 being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the | |
5158 mouse clicks itself. | |
148 | 5159 This option is reset when starting the GUI. Thus if you set it in |
5160 your .vimrc it will work in a terminal, but not in the GUI. Setting | |
5161 'paste' in the GUI has side effects: e.g., the Paste toolbar button | |
5162 will no longer work in Insert mode, because it uses a mapping. | |
7 | 5163 When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on): |
5164 - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled | |
5165 - abbreviations are disabled | |
5166 - 'textwidth' is set to 0 | |
5167 - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0 | |
5168 - 'autoindent' is reset | |
5169 - 'smartindent' is reset | |
5170 - 'softtabstop' is set to 0 | |
5171 - 'revins' is reset | |
5172 - 'ruler' is reset | |
5173 - 'showmatch' is reset | |
5174 - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty | |
5175 These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled: | |
5176 - 'lisp' | |
5177 - 'indentexpr' | |
5178 - 'cindent' | |
5179 NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is | |
5180 on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the | |
5181 settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to | |
5182 set the 'paste' option again. | |
5183 When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to | |
5184 the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on. | |
5185 Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect. | |
5186 Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use | |
5187 the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key. | |
5188 | |
5189 *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'* | |
5190 'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "") | |
5191 global | |
5192 {not in Vi} | |
5193 When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste' | |
5194 option. This is like specifying a mapping: > | |
5195 :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR> | |
5196 < Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'. | |
5197 The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set. | |
5198 'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in | |
5199 Command-line mode. | |
5200 Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However, | |
5201 when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do | |
5202 this: > | |
5203 :map <F10> :set paste<CR> | |
5204 :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR> | |
5205 :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR> | |
5206 :imap <F11> <nop> | |
5207 :set pastetoggle=<F11> | |
5208 < This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode. | |
5209 Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste | |
5210 mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key | |
5211 sequence. | |
1621 | 5212 When the value has several bytes 'ttimeoutlen' applies. |
7 | 5213 |
5214 *'pex'* *'patchexpr'* | |
5215 'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "") | |
5216 global | |
5217 {not in Vi} | |
5218 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
5219 feature} | |
5220 Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate | |
10 | 5221 the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|. |
7 | 5222 |
5223 *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206* | |
5224 'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "") | |
5225 global | |
5226 {not in Vi} | |
5227 When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used | |
5228 to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a | |
5229 source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a | |
5230 copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the | |
5231 name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option | |
5232 appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like | |
5233 ".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The | |
5234 backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has | |
5235 been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a | |
5236 backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is | |
5237 created. | |
5238 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made. | |
5239 Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the | |
5240 end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always | |
5241 recognized as a compressed file. | |
36 | 5242 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 5243 |
5244 *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347* | |
5245 'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,," | |
5246 on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,," | |
5247 other systems: ".,,") | |
5248 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
5249 {not in Vi} | |
5250 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the | |
1668 | 5251 |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands, |
5252 provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not | |
5253 starting with "/", "./" or "../"). The directories in the 'path' | |
5254 option may be relative or absolute. | |
7 | 5255 - Use commas to separate directory names: > |
5256 :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include | |
5257 < - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards | |
5258 compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory | |
5259 name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: > | |
5260 :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space | |
5261 < - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra | |
5262 backslash: > | |
5263 :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma | |
5264 < - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: > | |
5265 :set path=. | |
5266 < - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two | |
5267 commas: > | |
5268 :set path=,, | |
5269 < - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'. | |
5270 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5271 - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding | |
5272 "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work. | |
1668 | 5273 - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and |
5274 ";". See |file-searching| for info and syntax. | |
7 | 5275 {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature} |
5276 - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: > | |
5277 :set path=.,c:\\include | |
5278 < Or just use '/' instead: > | |
5279 :set path=.,c:/include | |
5280 < Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as | |
5281 the file! | |
10 | 5282 The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly |
7 | 5283 it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. |
5284 You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of | |
5285 'path', see |:checkpath|. | |
5286 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
5287 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
5288 uses another default. To remove the current directory use: > | |
5289 :set path-= | |
5290 < To add the current directory use: > | |
5291 :set path+= | |
5292 < To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the | |
5293 separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory | |
5294 names are separated with a semi-colon: > | |
5295 :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g') | |
5296 < Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that | |
5297 this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space. | |
5298 | |
5299 *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'* | |
5300 'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off) | |
5301 local to buffer | |
5302 {not in Vi} | |
5303 When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the | |
5304 indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a | |
5305 series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is | |
5306 enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option | |
5307 means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible | |
5308 for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required. | |
1621 | 5309 'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains |
5310 a Tab. | |
7 | 5311 NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of |
5312 tabs and spaces. You might not like this. | |
5313 NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
5314 Also see 'copyindent'. | |
5315 Use |:retab| to clean up white space. | |
5316 | |
5317 *'previewheight'* *'pvh'* | |
5318 'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12) | |
5319 global | |
5320 {not in Vi} | |
5321 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5322 |+quickfix| features} |
7 | 5323 Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated |
5324 commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given. | |
5325 | |
5326 *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'* | |
5327 *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590* | |
5328 'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off) | |
5329 local to window | |
5330 {not in Vi} | |
5331 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5332 |+quickfix| features} |
10 | 5333 Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option |
7 | 5334 set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands |
5335 |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc. | |
5336 | |
5337 *'printdevice'* *'pdev'* | |
5338 'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty) | |
5339 global | |
5340 {not in Vi} | |
5341 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5342 feature} | |
15 | 5343 The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|. |
5344 See |pdev-option|. | |
36 | 5345 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
5346 security reasons. | |
15 | 5347 |
5348 *'printencoding'* *'penc'* | |
5349 'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for some systems) | |
7 | 5350 global |
5351 {not in Vi} | |
5352 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5353 and |+postscript| features} | |
15 | 5354 Sets the character encoding used when printing. |
5355 See |penc-option|. | |
7 | 5356 |
5357 *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'* | |
5358 'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below) | |
5359 global | |
5360 {not in Vi} | |
5361 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5362 and |+postscript| features} | |
15 | 5363 Expression used to print the PostScript produced with |:hardcopy|. |
5364 See |pexpr-option|. | |
5365 | |
5366 *'printfont'* *'pfn'* | |
7 | 5367 'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier") |
5368 global | |
5369 {not in Vi} | |
5370 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5371 feature} | |
15 | 5372 The name of the font that will be used for |:hardcopy|. |
5373 See |pfn-option|. | |
7 | 5374 |
5375 *'printheader'* *'pheader'* | |
5376 'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N") | |
5377 global | |
5378 {not in Vi} | |
5379 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5380 feature} | |
15 | 5381 The format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output. |
5382 See |pheader-option|. | |
5383 | |
5384 *'printmbcharset'* *'pmbcs'* | |
5385 'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs' string (default "") | |
5386 global | |
5387 {not in Vi} | |
180 | 5388 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |
5389 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} | |
15 | 5390 The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. |
5391 See |pmbcs-option|. | |
5392 | |
5393 *'printmbfont'* *'pmbfn'* | |
5394 'printmbfont' 'pmbfn' string (default "") | |
5395 global | |
5396 {not in Vi} | |
180 | 5397 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |
5398 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} | |
15 | 5399 List of font names to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. |
5400 See |pmbfn-option|. | |
7 | 5401 |
5402 *'printoptions'* *'popt'* | |
5403 'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "") | |
5404 global | |
5405 {not in Vi} | |
5406 {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature} | |
15 | 5407 List of items that control the format of the output of |:hardcopy|. |
5408 See |popt-option|. | |
5409 | |
168 | 5410 *'prompt'* *'noprompt'* |
5411 'prompt' boolean (default on) | |
5412 global | |
5413 When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode. | |
5414 | |
766 | 5415 *'pumheight'* *'ph'* |
5416 'pumheight' 'ph' number (default 0) | |
5417 global | |
5418 {not available when compiled without the | |
5419 |+insert_expand| feature} | |
5420 {not in Vi} | |
853 | 5421 Determines the maximum number of items to show in the popup menu for |
5422 Insert mode completion. When zero as much space as available is used. | |
766 | 5423 |ins-completion-menu|. |
5424 | |
5425 | |
140 | 5426 *'quoteescape'* *'qe'* |
12 | 5427 'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\") |
5428 local to buffer | |
5429 {not in Vi} | |
5430 The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for | |
5431 objects like a', a" and a` |a'|. | |
5432 When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string, | |
5433 the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the | |
5434 text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string. | |
5435 | |
7 | 5436 *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'* |
5437 'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off) | |
5438 local to buffer | |
5439 If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from | |
5440 accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started | |
5441 in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view". | |
164 | 5442 When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current |
5443 buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'. | |
7 | 5444 {not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is |
164 | 5445 set for the newly edited buffer. |
7 | 5446 |
1521 | 5447 *'redrawtime'* *'rdt'* |
5448 'redrawtime' 'rdt' number (default 2000) | |
5449 global | |
5450 {not in Vi} | |
5451 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| | |
5452 feature} | |
5453 The time in milliseconds for redrawing the display. This applies to | |
5454 searching for patterns for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting. | |
5455 When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further | |
5456 matches will be highlighted. This is used to avoid that Vim hangs | |
5457 when using a very complicated pattern. | |
5458 | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5459 *'relativenumber'* *'rnu'* *'norelativenumber'* *'nornu'* |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5460 'relativenumber' 'rnu' boolean (default off) |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5461 local to window |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5462 {not in Vi} |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5463 Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of |
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2204
diff
changeset
|
5464 each line. Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5465 precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5466 having to calculate it yourself. Especially useful in combination with |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5467 other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =). |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5468 When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5469 line will not use the column of line numbers (this is the default when |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5470 'compatible' isn't set). |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5471 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5472 number. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5473 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5474 characters are put before the number. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5475 See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5476 When setting this option, 'number' is reset. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5477 |
7 | 5478 *'remap'* *'noremap'* |
5479 'remap' boolean (default on) | |
5480 global | |
5481 Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for | |
5482 a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command. | |
717 | 5483 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with Vim scripts, always keep |
5484 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with | |
5485 old Vi scripts. | |
7 | 5486 |
5487 *'report'* | |
5488 'report' number (default 2) | |
5489 global | |
5490 Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of | |
5491 changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most | |
5492 ":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0. | |
5493 For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used | |
5494 instead of the number of lines. | |
5495 | |
5496 *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'* | |
5497 'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on) | |
5498 global | |
5499 {not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version} | |
5500 When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also | |
5501 happens when executing external commands. | |
5502 | |
5503 For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te' | |
5504 options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring: | |
5505 set t_ti= t_te= | |
5506 To enable restoring (for an xterm): | |
5507 set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8 | |
5508 (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it) | |
5509 | |
5510 *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'* | |
5511 'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off) | |
5512 global | |
5513 {not in Vi} | |
5514 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
5515 feature} | |
5516 Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing | |
5517 backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_ | |
5518 command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set. | |
5519 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set. | |
5520 | |
5521 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'* | |
5522 'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off) | |
5523 local to window | |
5524 {not in Vi} | |
5525 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
5526 feature} | |
5527 When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters | |
5528 that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left. | |
5529 Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that | |
5530 are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic. | |
5531 This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files | |
5532 simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is | |
5533 useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left | |
5534 and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly | |
5535 in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|. | |
5536 | |
2341 | 5537 *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* |
7 | 5538 'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search") |
5539 local to window | |
5540 {not in Vi} | |
5541 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
5542 feature} | |
5543 Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in | |
5544 right-to-left mode for a group of commands: | |
5545 | |
5546 search "/" and "?" commands | |
5547 | |
5548 This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi. | |
5549 The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect. | |
5550 | |
5551 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'* | |
5552 'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off) | |
5553 global | |
5554 {not in Vi} | |
5555 {not available when compiled without the | |
5556 |+cmdline_info| feature} | |
5557 Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a | |
10 | 5558 comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed |
7 | 5559 text in the file is shown on the far right: |
5560 Top first line is visible | |
5561 Bot last line is visible | |
5562 All first and last line are visible | |
5563 45% relative position in the file | |
5564 If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler. | |
10 | 5565 Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the |
7 | 5566 ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the |
233 | 5567 screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (i.e. not empty), |
7 | 5568 this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat' |
5569 If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of | |
5570 bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both | |
5571 the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown, | |
5572 separated with a dash. | |
5573 For an empty line "0-1" is shown. | |
5574 For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1". | |
5575 This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set. | |
5576 If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where | |
5577 you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|. | |
5578 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
5579 | |
5580 *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'* | |
5581 'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty) | |
5582 global | |
5583 {not in Vi} | |
5584 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| | |
5585 feature} | |
5586 When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler | |
5587 string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option. | |
692 | 5588 The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. |
7 | 5589 The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15 |
5590 characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end. | |
5591 Example: > | |
5592 :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%) | |
5593 < | |
5594 *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles* | |
5595 'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default: | |
5596 Unix: "$HOME/.vim, | |
5597 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
5598 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5599 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
5600 $HOME/.vim/after" | |
5601 Amiga: "home:vimfiles, | |
5602 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
5603 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5604 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
5605 home:vimfiles/after" | |
5606 PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles, | |
5607 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
5608 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5609 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
5610 $HOME/vimfiles/after" | |
5611 Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles, | |
5612 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5613 $VIM:vimfiles:after" | |
5614 RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles, | |
5615 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5616 Choices:vimfiles/after" | |
5617 VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles, | |
5618 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
5619 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5620 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
233 | 5621 sys$login:vimfiles/after") |
7 | 5622 global |
5623 {not in Vi} | |
5624 This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime | |
5625 files: | |
5626 filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype| | |
5627 scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts| | |
164 | 5628 autoload/ automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions| |
7 | 5629 colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme| |
5630 compiler/ compiler files |:compiler| | |
5631 doc/ documentation |write-local-help| | |
5632 ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin| | |
5633 indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression| | |
5634 keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap| | |
5635 lang/ menu translations |:menutrans| | |
5636 menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim| | |
5637 plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin| | |
5638 print/ files for printing |postscript-print-encoding| | |
650 | 5639 spell/ spell checking files |spell| |
7 | 5640 syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile| |
5641 tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor| | |
5642 | |
5643 And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command. | |
5644 | |
5645 The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations: | |
5646 1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences. | |
5647 2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system | |
5648 administrator. | |
5649 3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim. | |
5650 *after-directory* | |
5651 4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is | |
5652 for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed | |
5653 defaults (rarely needed) | |
5654 5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for | |
5655 personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults | |
5656 or system-wide settings (rarely needed). | |
5657 | |
5658 Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal | |
5659 wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for | |
10 | 5660 runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid |
7 | 5661 wildcards. |
5662 See |:runtime|. | |
5663 Example: > | |
5664 :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME | |
5665 < This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your | |
5666 personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a | |
5667 group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime | |
5668 files). | |
5669 You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the | |
5670 distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME | |
5671 to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put | |
5672 a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed | |
5673 runtime files. | |
5674 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5675 security reasons. | |
5676 | |
5677 *'scroll'* *'scr'* | |
5678 'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height) | |
5679 local to window | |
5680 Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be | |
5681 set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size | |
5682 changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will | |
10 | 5683 be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window |
7 | 5684 height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives |
5685 the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference | |
5686 when lines wrap} | |
5687 | |
5688 *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'* | |
5689 'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off) | |
5690 local to window | |
5691 {not in Vi} | |
5692 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind| | |
5693 feature} | |
5694 See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current | |
5695 window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have | |
5696 this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the | |
5697 differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'. | |
5698 See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be | |
5699 interpreted. | |
5700 This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another | |
5701 file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows | |
5702 with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not. | |
5703 | |
5704 *'scrolljump'* *'sj'* | |
5705 'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1) | |
5706 global | |
5707 {not in Vi} | |
5708 Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the | |
5709 screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E, | |
5710 CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly. | |
532 | 5711 When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the |
5712 percentage of the window height. Thus -50 scrolls half the window | |
5713 height. | |
7 | 5714 NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set. |
5715 | |
5716 *'scrolloff'* *'so'* | |
5717 'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0) | |
5718 global | |
5719 {not in Vi} | |
5720 Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor. | |
5721 This will make some context visible around where you are working. If | |
5722 you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be | |
5723 in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or | |
5724 when long lines wrap). | |
5725 For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'. | |
5726 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
5727 | |
5728 *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'* | |
5729 'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump") | |
5730 global | |
5731 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind| | |
5732 feature} | |
5733 {not in Vi} | |
5734 This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how | |
236 | 5735 'scrollbind' windows should behave. 'sbo' stands for ScrollBind |
5736 Options. | |
7 | 5737 The following words are available: |
5738 ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows | |
5739 hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows | |
5740 jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical | |
5741 scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first | |
5742 displayed line of the bound windows. When moving | |
5743 around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may | |
5744 reach a position before the start or after the end of | |
5745 the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when | |
5746 moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll | |
5747 to the desired position when possible. | |
5748 When now making that window the current one, two | |
5749 things can be done with the relative offset: | |
5750 1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is | |
5751 adjusted for the scroll position in the new current | |
5752 window. When going back to the other window, the | |
1152 | 5753 new relative offset will be used. |
7 | 5754 2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are |
5755 scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When | |
5756 going back to the other window, it still uses the | |
5757 same relative offset. | |
5758 Also see |scroll-binding|. | |
819 | 5759 When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding, |
5760 even when "ver" isn't there. | |
7 | 5761 |
5762 *'sections'* *'sect'* | |
5763 'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh") | |
5764 global | |
5765 Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of | |
5766 two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start | |
5767 at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh". | |
5768 | |
5769 *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523* | |
5770 'secure' boolean (default off) | |
5771 global | |
5772 {not in Vi} | |
5773 When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in | |
5774 ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are | |
5775 displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into | |
5776 problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is | |
5777 only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be | |
10 | 5778 dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set |
7 | 5779 'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then. |
5780 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5781 security reasons. | |
5782 | |
5783 *'selection'* *'sel'* | |
5784 'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive") | |
5785 global | |
5786 {not in Vi} | |
5787 This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used | |
5788 in Visual and Select mode. | |
5789 Possible values: | |
5790 value past line inclusive ~ | |
5791 old no yes | |
5792 inclusive yes yes | |
5793 exclusive yes no | |
5794 "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one | |
5795 character past the line. | |
5796 "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included | |
5797 in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the | |
5798 selection. | |
5799 Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end | |
5800 backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when | |
5801 starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty. | |
5802 | |
5803 The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
5804 | |
5805 *'selectmode'* *'slm'* | |
5806 'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "") | |
5807 global | |
5808 {not in Vi} | |
5809 This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start | |
5810 Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started. | |
5811 Possible values: | |
5812 mouse when using the mouse | |
5813 key when using shifted special keys | |
5814 cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V | |
5815 See |Select-mode|. | |
5816 The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
5817 | |
5818 *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'* | |
5819 'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds, | |
827 | 5820 help,options,tabpages,winsize") |
7 | 5821 global |
5822 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5823 {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| |
7 | 5824 feature} |
5825 Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma | |
5826 separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring | |
5827 something: | |
5828 word save and restore ~ | |
5829 blank empty windows | |
5830 buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows | |
5831 curdir the current directory | |
5832 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local | |
5833 fold options | |
5834 globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter | |
75 | 5835 and contain at least one lowercase letter. Only |
5836 String and Number types are stored. | |
7 | 5837 help the help window |
5838 localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not | |
5839 global values for local options) | |
5840 options all options and mappings (also global values for local | |
5841 options) | |
5842 resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns' | |
5843 sesdir the directory in which the session file is located | |
5844 will become the current directory (useful with | |
5845 projects accessed over a network from different | |
5846 systems) | |
5847 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward | |
5848 slashes | |
827 | 5849 tabpages all tab pages; without this only the current tab page |
5850 is restored, so that you can make a session for each | |
5851 tab page separately | |
7 | 5852 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when |
5853 on Windows or DOS | |
5854 winpos position of the whole Vim window | |
5855 winsize window sizes | |
5856 | |
5857 Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5858 When neither "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5859 with absolute paths. |
7 | 5860 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files |
5861 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, | |
5862 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. | |
5863 | |
5864 *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91* | |
5865 'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh", | |
5866 MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or | |
5867 "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd") | |
5868 global | |
5869 Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the | |
5870 value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash' | |
5871 'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'. | |
10 | 5872 It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f". |
7 | 5873 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
5874 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5875 If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose | |
5876 it in quotes. Example: > | |
5877 :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f | |
5878 < Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and | |
10 | 5879 each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the |
7 | 5880 "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command |
5881 name. And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path | |
5882 separators. | |
5883 For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment | |
5884 variable to change the way external commands are executed. See the | |
5885 libc.inf file of DJGPP. | |
5886 Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be | |
5887 included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com" | |
5888 works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g., | |
5889 filtering). | |
5890 For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is | |
5891 changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: > | |
5892 :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos | |
5893 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5894 security reasons. | |
5895 | |
5896 *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'* | |
5897 'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' | |
5898 does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c") | |
5899 global | |
5900 {not in Vi} | |
5901 Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g., | |
5902 "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like | |
5903 systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to | |
5904 reduce the need to set this option by the user. It's not used for | |
5905 OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself). See |option-backslash| about | |
5906 including spaces and backslashes. See |dos-shell|. | |
5907 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5908 security reasons. | |
5909 | |
5910 *'shellpipe'* *'sp'* | |
5911 'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee") | |
5912 global | |
5913 {not in Vi} | |
5914 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
5915 feature} | |
5916 String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the | |
10 | 5917 error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about |
7 | 5918 including spaces and backslashes. |
5919 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary | |
5920 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value | |
5921 of this option). | |
5922 For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly | |
5923 saved in a file and not echoed to the screen. | |
5924 For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved | |
5925 in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or | |
5926 "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the | |
2788 | 5927 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh" or "bash" the |
5928 default becomes "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included. | |
5929 Before using the 'shell' option a path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses | |
5930 "sh". | |
7 | 5931 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" |
5932 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set | |
5933 there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was | |
5934 explicitly set before. | |
5935 When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the | |
5936 ":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg' | |
5937 that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do | |
5938 want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space. | |
5939 Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ". | |
5940 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will | |
5941 become obsolete (at least for Unix). | |
5942 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5943 security reasons. | |
5944 | |
5945 *'shellquote'* *'shq'* | |
5946 'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' | |
5947 contains "sh" somewhere: "\"") | |
5948 global | |
5949 {not in Vi} | |
5950 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for | |
5951 the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the | |
5952 quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's | |
5953 probably not useful to set both options. | |
5954 This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for | |
5955 third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell | |
5956 or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according | |
5957 the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the | |
5958 user. See |dos-shell|. | |
5959 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5960 security reasons. | |
5961 | |
5962 *'shellredir'* *'srr'* | |
5963 'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1") | |
5964 global | |
5965 {not in Vi} | |
5966 String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary | |
5967 file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces | |
5968 and backslashes. | |
5969 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary | |
5970 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value | |
5971 of this option). | |
5972 The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh" | |
5973 or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the | |
5974 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes | |
5975 ">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included. | |
5976 For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked | |
5977 for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with | |
5978 ".exe" appended are checked for. | |
5979 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" | |
5980 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set | |
5981 there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was | |
5982 explicitly set before. | |
5983 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will | |
5984 become obsolete (at least for Unix). | |
5985 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5986 security reasons. | |
5987 | |
5988 *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'* | |
5989 'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off) | |
5990 global | |
5991 {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} | |
5992 When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is | |
5993 useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or | |
5994 cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to | |
5995 forward slashes by Vim. | |
5996 Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some | |
5997 existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening | |
5998 any file for best results. This might change in the future. | |
5999 'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path | |
6000 separator. To test if this is so use: > | |
6001 if exists('+shellslash') | |
6002 < | |
168 | 6003 *'shelltemp'* *'stmp'* *'noshelltemp'* *'nostmp'* |
6004 'shelltemp' 'stmp' boolean (Vi default off, Vim default on) | |
6005 global | |
6006 {not in Vi} | |
6007 When on, use temp files for shell commands. When off use a pipe. | |
6008 When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway. | |
6009 Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix. You can check it with: > | |
6010 :if has("filterpipe") | |
6011 < The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file | |
6012 and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection. | |
6013 The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding | |
6014 can be detected. | |
6015 The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|, | |
6016 |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when | |
6017 'shelltemp' is off. | |
6018 | |
7 | 6019 *'shelltype'* *'st'* |
6020 'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0) | |
6021 global | |
6022 {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga} | |
6023 On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work | |
6024 which use a shell. | |
6025 0 and 1: always use the shell | |
6026 2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines | |
6027 4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command | |
6028 When not using the shell, the command is executed directly. | |
6029 | |
6030 0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands | |
6031 1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands | |
6032 | |
6033 *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'* | |
6034 'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: ""; | |
6035 for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh" | |
6036 somewhere: "\"" | |
6037 for Unix, when using system(): "\"") | |
6038 global | |
6039 {not in Vi} | |
6040 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for | |
6041 the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See | |
6042 'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful | |
6043 to set both options. | |
6044 This is an empty string by default. Known to be useful for | |
6045 third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn | |
6046 Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted | |
6047 according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option | |
6048 by the user. See |dos-shell|. | |
6049 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6050 security reasons. | |
6051 | |
6052 *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'* | |
6053 'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off) | |
6054 global | |
6055 {not in Vi} | |
6056 Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and < | |
6057 commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to | |
6058 a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible). | |
6059 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
6060 | |
6061 *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'* | |
6062 'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8) | |
6063 local to buffer | |
10 | 6064 Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for |
7 | 6065 |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc. |
6066 | |
6067 *'shortmess'* *'shm'* | |
168 | 6068 'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "", |
6069 POSIX default: "A") | |
7 | 6070 global |
6071 {not in Vi} | |
6072 This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file | |
6073 messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages. | |
6074 It is a list of flags: | |
6075 flag meaning when present ~ | |
6076 f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)" | |
6077 i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]" | |
6078 l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters" | |
6079 m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]" | |
6080 n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]" | |
6081 r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]" | |
6082 w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message | |
6083 and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command | |
6084 x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of | |
6085 "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]". | |
6086 a all of the above abbreviations | |
6087 | |
6088 o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message | |
6089 for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on) | |
6090 O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message. | |
6091 Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn"). | |
6092 s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search | |
6093 hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages | |
6094 t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit | |
6095 on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column. | |
6096 Ignored in Ex mode. | |
6097 T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to | |
233 | 6098 fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle. |
7 | 6099 Ignored in Ex mode. |
6100 W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file | |
6101 A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file | |
6102 is found. | |
6103 I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|. | |
6104 | |
6105 This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers | |
6106 requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as | |
6107 possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you | |
6108 would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!" | |
6109 Useful values: | |
6110 shm= No abbreviation of message. | |
6111 shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information. | |
6112 shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary. | |
6113 | |
6114 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
6115 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
6116 | |
6117 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'* | |
6118 'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off) | |
6119 local to buffer | |
6120 {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions} | |
6121 Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3 | |
6122 characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this | |
6123 option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when | |
6124 adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available | |
6125 for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful | |
6126 when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos | |
6127 or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this | |
6128 option is always on by default. | |
6129 | |
6130 *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595* | |
6131 'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "") | |
6132 global | |
6133 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
6134 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| |
7 | 6135 feature} |
6136 String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6137 values are "> " or "+++ ": > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6138 :set showbreak=>\ |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6139 < Note the backslash to escape the trailing space. It's easier like |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6140 this: > |
2314
233eb4412f5d
Added 'colorcolumn' option. Partly by Gregor Uhlenheuer.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2302
diff
changeset
|
6141 :let &showbreak = '+++ ' |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6142 < Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and |
7 | 6143 comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the |
6144 part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line). | |
6145 The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in | |
6146 'highlight'. | |
6147 Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently. | |
6148 If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the | |
6149 "n" flag to 'cpoptions'. | |
6150 | |
6151 *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'* | |
6152 'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default: | |
6153 off) | |
6154 global | |
6155 {not in Vi} | |
6156 {not available when compiled without the | |
6157 |+cmdline_info| feature} | |
1152 | 6158 Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen. Set this |
6159 option off if your terminal is slow. | |
7 | 6160 In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown: |
6161 - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters. | |
2324
0a258a67051d
In Visual mode with 'showcmd' display the number of bytes and characters.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2317
diff
changeset
|
6162 If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6" |
0a258a67051d
In Visual mode with 'showcmd' display the number of bytes and characters.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2317
diff
changeset
|
6163 means two characters and six bytes. |
7 | 6164 - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines. |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6165 - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6166 {lines}x{columns}. |
7 | 6167 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
6168 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
6169 | |
6170 *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'* | |
6171 'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off) | |
6172 global | |
6173 {not in Vi} | |
6174 When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the | |
6175 tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search | |
10 | 6176 pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have |
7 | 6177 matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are |
6178 required (coding style permitting). | |
1621 | 6179 Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in |
6180 'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not | |
6181 match the typed text. | |
7 | 6182 |
6183 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'* | |
6184 'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off) | |
6185 global | |
6186 When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The | |
6187 jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to | |
6188 show the match can be set with 'matchtime'. | |
6189 A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be | |
6190 seen or not). This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set. | |
6191 When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character | |
6192 will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs. | |
6193 See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and | |
6194 blinking when showing the match. | |
6195 The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show | |
6196 matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite | |
6197 matches. | |
699 | 6198 Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving |
6199 around |pi_paren.txt|. | |
6200 Note: Use of the short form is rated PG. | |
7 | 6201 |
6202 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'* | |
6203 'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
6204 global | |
6205 If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line. | |
6206 Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for | |
6207 this message. | |
10 | 6208 When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this |
7 | 6209 doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is |
6210 not set. | |
6211 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
6212 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
6213 | |
677 | 6214 *'showtabline'* *'stal'* |
6215 'showtabline' 'stal' number (default 1) | |
6216 global | |
6217 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
6218 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
677 | 6219 feature} |
6220 The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels | |
6221 will be displayed: | |
6222 0: never | |
6223 1: only if there are at least two tab pages | |
6224 2: always | |
6225 This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages | |
6226 line. | |
6227 See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages. | |
6228 | |
7 | 6229 *'sidescroll'* *'ss'* |
6230 'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0) | |
6231 global | |
6232 {not in Vi} | |
6233 The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when | |
6234 the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen. | |
6235 When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen. | |
6236 When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using | |
6237 a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl" | |
6238 commands. | |
6239 | |
6240 *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'* | |
6241 'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0) | |
6242 global | |
6243 {not in Vi} | |
6244 The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the | |
534 | 6245 right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a |
6246 value greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero | |
6247 value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in | |
6248 horizontally (except at beginning of the line). Setting this option | |
6249 to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor | |
6250 horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too | |
6251 close to the beginning of the line. | |
7 | 6252 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
6253 | |
6254 Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as | |
6255 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move | |
6256 onto the "extends" character: | |
6257 | |
6258 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:< | |
6259 :set sidescrolloff=1 | |
6260 | |
6261 | |
6262 *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'* | |
6263 'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off) | |
6264 global | |
6265 {not in Vi} | |
6266 Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper | |
6267 case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and | |
6268 'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N", | |
10 | 6269 ":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.. After |
7 | 6270 "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command, |
6271 recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>. | |
6272 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
6273 | |
6274 *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'* | |
6275 'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off) | |
6276 local to buffer | |
6277 {not in Vi} | |
6278 {not available when compiled without the | |
6279 |+smartindent| feature} | |
6280 Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like | |
6281 programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does | |
6282 something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict, | |
2662 | 6283 see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set, |
2642 | 6284 setting 'si' has no effect. 'indentexpr' is a more advanced |
6285 alternative. | |
7 | 6286 Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'. |
6287 An indent is automatically inserted: | |
6288 - After a line ending in '{'. | |
6289 - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'. | |
6290 - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command). | |
6291 When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is | |
6292 given the same indent as the matching '{'. | |
6293 When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for | |
6294 that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent | |
10 | 6295 is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this |
7 | 6296 mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H. |
6297 When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted | |
6298 right. | |
10 | 6299 NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. When 'paste' |
7 | 6300 is set smart indenting is disabled. |
6301 | |
6302 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'* | |
6303 'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off) | |
6304 global | |
6305 {not in Vi} | |
6306 When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to | |
648 | 6307 'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' or 'softtabstop' is used in other places. A |
6308 <BS> will delete a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the | |
6309 line. | |
650 | 6310 When off, a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop' or |
648 | 6311 'softtabstop'. 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or |
6312 right |shift-left-right|. | |
1263 | 6313 What gets inserted (a <Tab> or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab' |
7 | 6314 option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the |
11 | 6315 number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. |
7 | 6316 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
6317 | |
6318 *'softtabstop'* *'sts'* | |
6319 'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0) | |
6320 local to buffer | |
6321 {not in Vi} | |
6322 Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing | |
6323 operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like | |
6324 <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is | |
6325 used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value | |
6326 of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However, | |
6327 commands like "x" still work on the actual characters. | |
6328 When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off. | |
6329 'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. | |
6330 See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of | |
6331 spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. | |
6332 The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is | |
6333 set. | |
6334 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
6335 | |
221 | 6336 *'spell'* *'nospell'* |
6337 'spell' boolean (default off) | |
6338 local to window | |
6339 {not in Vi} | |
6340 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6341 feature} | |
6342 When on spell checking will be done. See |spell|. | |
236 | 6343 The languages are specified with 'spelllang'. |
221 | 6344 |
386 | 6345 *'spellcapcheck'* *'spc'* |
389 | 6346 'spellcapcheck' 'spc' string (default "[.?!]\_[\])'" \t]\+") |
386 | 6347 local to buffer |
6348 {not in Vi} | |
6349 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6350 feature} | |
6351 Pattern to locate the end of a sentence. The following word will be | |
6352 checked to start with a capital letter. If not then it is highlighted | |
484 | 6353 with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled). |
386 | 6354 When this check is not wanted make this option empty. |
6355 Only used when 'spell' is set. | |
389 | 6356 Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about |
6357 including spaces and backslashes. | |
480 | 6358 To set this option automatically depending on the language, see |
6359 |set-spc-auto|. | |
386 | 6360 |
314 | 6361 *'spellfile'* *'spf'* |
6362 'spellfile' 'spf' string (default empty) | |
6363 local to buffer | |
6364 {not in Vi} | |
6365 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6366 feature} | |
6367 Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw| | |
401 | 6368 commands. It must end in ".{encoding}.add". You need to include the |
6369 path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory. | |
386 | 6370 *E765* |
6371 It may also be a comma separated list of names. A count before the | |
6372 |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each. This allows using | |
6373 a personal word list file and a project word list file. | |
314 | 6374 When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for |
819 | 6375 you: Using the first directory in 'runtimepath' that is writable. If |
6376 there is no "spell" directory yet it will be created. For the file | |
6377 name the first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used, | |
353 | 6378 ignoring the region. |
6379 The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not | |
6380 have to appear in 'spelllang'. | |
6381 Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region | |
6382 name if you want to. However, it will then only be used when | |
6383 'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files | |
6384 without region name will be found. | |
336 | 6385 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
6386 security reasons. | |
314 | 6387 |
221 | 6388 *'spelllang'* *'spl'* |
314 | 6389 'spelllang' 'spl' string (default "en") |
221 | 6390 local to buffer |
6391 {not in Vi} | |
6392 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6393 feature} | |
353 | 6394 A comma separated list of word list names. When the 'spell' option is |
6395 on spellchecking will be done for these languages. Example: > | |
6396 set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical | |
6397 < This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized. Words | |
6398 that are not recognized will be highlighted. | |
6399 The word list name must not include a comma or dot. Using a dash is | |
6400 recommended to separate the two letter language name from a | |
6401 specification. Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words. | |
6402 A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is | |
6403 the two-letter, lower case region name. You can use more than one | |
6404 region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian | |
6405 English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great | |
6406 Britain. | |
484 | 6407 *E757* |
419 | 6408 As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is. The |
6409 first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name | |
6410 (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter). | |
6411 This is mainly for testing purposes. You must make sure the correct | |
6412 encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it. | |
236 | 6413 When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded. Thus it's a good |
419 | 6414 idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding' to avoid loading the |
6415 files twice. | |
353 | 6416 How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|. |
221 | 6417 |
653 | 6418 If the |spellfile.vim| plugin is active and you use a language name |
6419 for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin | |
6420 will ask you if you want to download the file. | |
6421 | |
480 | 6422 After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files |
6423 "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'. "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang' | |
650 | 6424 up to the first comma, dot or underscore. |
6425 Also see |set-spc-auto|. | |
480 | 6426 |
6427 | |
344 | 6428 *'spellsuggest'* *'sps'* |
6429 'spellsuggest' 'sps' string (default "best") | |
6430 global | |
6431 {not in Vi} | |
6432 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6433 feature} | |
593 | 6434 Methods used for spelling suggestions. Both for the |z=| command and |
374 | 6435 the |spellsuggest()| function. This is a comma-separated list of |
6436 items: | |
6437 | |
6438 best Internal method that works best for English. Finds | |
6439 changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like | |
6440 scoring to improve the ordering. | |
6441 | |
6442 double Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the | |
6443 results. The first method is "fast", the other method | |
344 | 6444 computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad |
374 | 6445 word. That only works when the language specifies |
6446 sound folding. Can be slow and doesn't always give | |
6447 better results. | |
6448 | |
6449 fast Internal method that only checks for simple changes: | |
6450 character inserts/deletes/swaps. Works well for | |
6451 simple typing mistakes. | |
6452 | |
593 | 6453 {number} The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|. |
484 | 6454 Not used for |spellsuggest()|. The number of |
6455 suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines' | |
6456 minus two. | |
6457 | |
374 | 6458 file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns, |
6459 separated by a slash. The first column contains the | |
6460 bad word, the second column the suggested good word. | |
6461 Example: | |
6462 theribal/terrible ~ | |
6463 Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the | |
6464 top of the suggestion list with the internal methods. | |
6465 Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for | |
6466 comments. | |
6467 The file is used for all languages. | |
6468 | |
6469 expr:{expr} Evaluate expression {expr}. Use a function to avoid | |
6470 trouble with spaces. |v:val| holds the badly spelled | |
6471 word. The expression must evaluate to a List of | |
6472 Lists, each with a suggestion and a score. | |
6473 Example: | |
6474 [['the', 33], ['that', 44]] | |
593 | 6475 Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the |
374 | 6476 internal methods use. A lower score is better. |
6477 This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily | |
6478 set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part. | |
6479 Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the | |
6480 'verbose' option to a non-zero value. | |
6481 | |
6482 Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used. The others may | |
6483 appear several times in any order. Example: > | |
6484 :set sps=file:~/.vim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest() | |
6485 < | |
6486 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6487 security reasons. | |
344 | 6488 |
6489 | |
7 | 6490 *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'* |
6491 'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off) | |
6492 global | |
6493 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
6494 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 6495 feature} |
6496 When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current | |
6497 one. |:split| | |
6498 | |
6499 *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'* | |
6500 'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off) | |
6501 global | |
6502 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
6503 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 6504 feature} |
6505 When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the | |
6506 current one. |:vsplit| | |
6507 | |
6508 *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'* | |
6509 'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on) | |
6510 global | |
6511 {not in Vi} | |
6512 When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first | |
11 | 6513 non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column |
10 | 6514 (if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B, |
11 | 6515 CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>" |
7 | 6516 with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing |
6517 commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that | |
6518 only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+". | |
6519 In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column | |
6520 where it was the last time the buffer was edited. | |
6521 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. | |
6522 | |
2709 | 6523 *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E542* |
7 | 6524 'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty) |
40 | 6525 global or local to window |global-local| |
7 | 6526 {not in Vi} |
6527 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| | |
6528 feature} | |
6529 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line. | |
6530 Also see |status-line|. | |
6531 | |
6532 The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with | |
6533 normal text. Each status line item is of the form: | |
6534 %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item} | |
6535 All fields except the {item} is optional. A single percent sign can | |
2709 | 6536 be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified. *E541* |
7 | 6537 |
680 | 6538 When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression, |
6539 evaluated and the result is used as the option value. Example: > | |
6540 :set statusline=%!MyStatusLine() | |
6541 < The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too. | |
6542 | |
6543 When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made | |
6544 empty to avoid further errors. Otherwise screen updating would loop. | |
6545 | |
7 | 6546 Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and |
6547 'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|. | |
6548 | |
6549 field meaning ~ | |
233 | 6550 - Left justify the item. The default is right justified |
7 | 6551 when minwid is larger than the length of the item. |
233 | 6552 0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'. |
7 | 6553 minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'. |
6554 Value must be 50 or less. | |
10 | 6555 maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<' |
7 | 6556 on the left for text items. Numeric items will be |
6557 shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number | |
6558 where number is the amount of missing digits, much like | |
6559 an exponential notation. | |
6560 item A one letter code as described below. | |
6561 | |
6562 Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The | |
6563 second character in "item" is the type: | |
6564 N for number | |
6565 S for string | |
6566 F for flags as described below | |
6567 - not applicable | |
6568 | |
6569 item meaning ~ | |
1152 | 6570 f S Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current |
6571 directory. | |
7 | 6572 F S Full path to the file in the buffer. |
6573 t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer. | |
1698 | 6574 m F Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off. |
7 | 6575 M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-". |
1698 | 6576 r F Readonly flag, text is "[RO]". |
7 | 6577 R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO". |
1698 | 6578 h F Help buffer flag, text is "[help]". |
7 | 6579 H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP". |
1698 | 6580 w F Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]". |
7 | 6581 W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV". |
1698 | 6582 y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]". See 'filetype'. |
7 | 6583 Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'. |
6584 {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature} | |
2411
68e394361ca3
Add "q" item for 'statusline'. Add w:quickfix_title. (Lech Lorens)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2400
diff
changeset
|
6585 q S "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty. |
7 | 6586 k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are |
6587 being used: "<keymap>" | |
6588 n N Buffer number. | |
2709 | 6589 b N Value of character under cursor. |
7 | 6590 B N As above, in hexadecimal. |
6591 o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1. | |
6592 Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added) | |
6593 {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature} | |
6594 O N As above, in hexadecimal. | |
233 | 6595 N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.) |
7 | 6596 l N Line number. |
6597 L N Number of lines in buffer. | |
6598 c N Column number. | |
6599 v N Virtual column number. | |
10 | 6600 V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'. |
7 | 6601 p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|. |
6602 P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the | |
6603 percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length. | |
233 | 6604 a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max}) |
7 | 6605 Empty if the argument file count is zero or one. |
680 | 6606 { NF Evaluate expression between '%{' and '}' and substitute result. |
625 | 6607 Note that there is no '%' before the closing '}'. |
7 | 6608 ( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and |
6609 alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere. | |
6610 ) - End of item group. No width fields allowed. | |
681 | 6611 T N For 'tabline': start of tab page N label. Use %T after the last |
6612 label. This information is used for mouse clicks. | |
6613 X N For 'tabline': start of close tab N label. Use %X after the | |
6614 label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X. Use %999X for a "close current tab" | |
6615 mark. This information is used for mouse clicks. | |
7 | 6616 < - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start. |
6617 No width fields allowed. | |
6618 = - Separation point between left and right aligned items. | |
6619 No width fields allowed. | |
680 | 6620 # - Set highlight group. The name must follow and then a # again. |
6621 Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname. The same | |
6622 highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current | |
6623 windows. | |
7 | 6624 * - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the |
233 | 6625 minwid field, e.g. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*. |
7 | 6626 The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied |
6627 to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows. | |
6628 The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9| | |
6629 | |
1698 | 6630 When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when |
6631 that flag comes right after plaintext. This will make a nice display | |
6632 when flags are used like in the examples below. | |
7 | 6633 |
233 | 6634 When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are |
7 | 6635 not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will |
6636 become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear | |
6637 completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. > | |
6638 :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)... | |
6639 < | |
6640 Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status | |
6641 line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set | |
6642 temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is | |
233 | 6643 currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context. |
7 | 6644 The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the |
634 | 6645 real current buffer. |
6646 | |
6647 The 'statusline' option may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see | |
6648 |sandbox-option|. | |
6649 | |
6650 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
6651 evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|. | |
7 | 6652 |
6653 If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting | |
6654 a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by | |
6655 setting an option without changing its value. Example: > | |
6656 :let &ro = &ro | |
6657 | |
6658 < A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes. | |
6659 Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules | |
6660 described above. | |
6661 | |
199 | 6662 Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable! |
7 | 6663 If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and |
6664 edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right. | |
6665 | |
6666 Examples: | |
6667 Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set > | |
6668 :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P | |
6669 < Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") > | |
6670 :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P | |
6671 < Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. > | |
6672 :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b' | |
6673 :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red | |
6674 < Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded > | |
6675 :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h... | |
6676 < In the |:autocmd|'s: > | |
6677 :let b:gzflag = 1 | |
6678 < And: > | |
6679 :unlet b:gzflag | |
6680 < And define this function: > | |
6681 :function VarExists(var, val) | |
6682 : if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif | |
6683 :endfunction | |
6684 < | |
6685 *'suffixes'* *'su'* | |
6686 'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj") | |
6687 global | |
6688 {not in Vi} | |
6689 Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files | |
6690 match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the | |
10 | 6691 suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as |
6692 the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a | |
7 | 6693 separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about |
6694 including spaces and backslashes). | |
6695 See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files. | |
6696 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
6697 suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
6698 uses another default. | |
6699 | |
6700 *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'* | |
6701 'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "") | |
6702 local to buffer | |
6703 {not in Vi} | |
6704 {not available when compiled without the | |
6705 |+file_in_path| feature} | |
6706 Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a | |
6707 file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: > | |
6708 :set suffixesadd=.java | |
6709 < | |
6710 *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'* | |
6711 'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on) | |
6712 local to buffer | |
6713 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 6714 Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a |
7 | 6715 swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with |
6716 confidential information that even root must not be able to access. | |
6717 Careful: All text will be in memory: | |
6718 - Don't use this for big files. | |
6719 - Recovery will be impossible! | |
6720 A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and | |
6721 'swapfile' is set. | |
6722 When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is | |
6723 immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is | |
6724 non-zero, a swap file is immediately created. | |
6725 Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|. | |
6726 | |
6727 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to | |
6728 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
6729 | |
6730 *'swapsync'* *'sws'* | |
6731 'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync") | |
6732 global | |
6733 {not in Vi} | |
6734 When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after | |
10 | 6735 writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems. |
7 | 6736 When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and |
6737 not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work. | |
6738 On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it, | |
6739 so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some | |
6740 systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system | |
6741 setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default | |
6742 fsync(), which may work better on some systems. | |
36 | 6743 The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file. |
7 | 6744 |
6745 *'switchbuf'* *'swb'* | |
6746 'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "") | |
6747 global | |
6748 {not in Vi} | |
6749 This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers. | |
6750 Possible values (comma separated list): | |
6751 useopen If included, jump to the first open window that | |
6752 contains the specified buffer (if there is one). | |
6753 Otherwise: Do not examine other windows. | |
6754 This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when | |
6755 jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is | |
6756 also used in all buffer related split commands, for | |
6757 example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind". | |
825 | 6758 usetab Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab |
856 | 6759 pages. |
7 | 6760 split If included, split the current window before loading |
233 | 6761 a buffer. Otherwise: do not split, use current window. |
7 | 6762 Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors. |
1621 | 6763 newtab Like "split", but open a new tab page. Overrules |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
6764 "split" when both are present. |
7 | 6765 |
410 | 6766 *'synmaxcol'* *'smc'* |
6767 'synmaxcol' 'smc' number (default 3000) | |
6768 local to buffer | |
6769 {not in Vi} | |
6770 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6771 feature} | |
419 | 6772 Maximum column in which to search for syntax items. In long lines the |
6773 text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not | |
6774 be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared. | |
410 | 6775 This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one |
6776 long line. | |
6777 Set to zero to remove the limit. | |
6778 | |
7 | 6779 *'syntax'* *'syn'* |
6780 'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty) | |
6781 local to buffer | |
6782 {not in Vi} | |
6783 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6784 feature} | |
6785 When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless | |
6786 syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off". | |
6787 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the | |
6788 b:current_syntax variable does). | |
6789 This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is | |
782 | 6790 not automatically recognized. Example, in an IDL file: |
6791 /* vim: set syntax=idl : */ ~ | |
6792 When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype | |
6793 names. Example: | |
6794 /* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */ ~ | |
6795 This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax. | |
6796 Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition, | |
6797 otherwise it will be skipped. More than one dot may appear. | |
6798 To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: > | |
7 | 6799 :set syntax=OFF |
6800 < To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the | |
6801 'filetype' option: > | |
6802 :set syntax=ON | |
6803 < What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the | |
6804 Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument. | |
6805 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or | |
6806 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. | |
36 | 6807 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 6808 |
699 | 6809 *'tabline'* *'tal'* |
677 | 6810 'tabline' 'tal' string (default empty) |
674 | 6811 global |
6812 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
6813 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
674 | 6814 feature} |
677 | 6815 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the tab pages |
6816 line at the top of the Vim window. When empty Vim will use a default | |
681 | 6817 tab pages line. See |setting-tabline| for more info. |
677 | 6818 |
6819 The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline' | |
688 | 6820 option and only when there is no GUI tab line. When 'e' is in |
6821 'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used | |
2572
ee53a39d5896
Last changes for the 7.3 release!
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2570
diff
changeset
|
6822 instead. Note that the two tab pages lines are very different. |
677 | 6823 |
6824 The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'. You can use | |
6825 |tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out | |
681 | 6826 the text to be displayed. Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for |
6827 the second one, etc. Use "%X" items for closing labels. | |
677 | 6828 |
6829 Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others | |
6830 are invisible and you can't jump to their windows. | |
6831 | |
674 | 6832 |
699 | 6833 *'tabpagemax'* *'tpm'* |
6834 'tabpagemax' 'tpm' number (default 10) | |
6835 global | |
6836 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
6837 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
699 | 6838 feature} |
6839 Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line | |
6840 argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage| | |
6841 | |
6842 | |
6843 *'tabstop'* *'ts'* | |
7 | 6844 'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8) |
6845 local to buffer | |
6846 Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see | |
6847 |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option. | |
6848 | |
6849 Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file | |
6850 appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it). | |
6851 | |
6852 There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim: | |
6853 1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4 | |
6854 (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim | |
1263 | 6855 will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing <Tab> and <BS> will |
7 | 6856 behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters. |
6857 2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use | |
6858 'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The | |
6859 formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed. | |
6860 3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a | |
10 | 6861 |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only |
7 | 6862 works when using Vim to edit the file. |
6863 4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and | |
6864 'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only) | |
6865 for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have | |
6866 tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this | |
6867 though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is | |
6868 changed. | |
6869 | |
6870 *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'* | |
6871 'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on) | |
6872 global | |
6873 {not in Vi} | |
6874 When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either | |
10 | 6875 use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary |
7 | 6876 searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search |
6877 will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted. | |
6878 Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that | |
6879 they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the | |
6880 'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off. | |
6881 | |
6882 When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags | |
10 | 6883 files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for |
7 | 6884 certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When |
6885 'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done. | |
6886 | |
6887 Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line | |
6888 at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: > | |
1621 | 6889 !_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some comment/ |
7 | 6890 < [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>] |
6891 | |
6892 When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the | |
6893 files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used | |
6894 instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search. | |
6895 Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only | |
6896 be found in the retry. | |
6897 | |
22 | 6898 If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second, |
7 | 6899 linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case. Use a value |
6900 of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be | |
6901 case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in | |
6902 the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6903 5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6904 for this as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6905 to work. |
7 | 6906 |
6907 When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match | |
6908 exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags | |
6909 files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off. | |
6910 When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on | |
6911 ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above | |
6912 must be included in the tags file. | |
6913 This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g., | |
6914 command-line completion and ":help"). | |
6915 {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions} | |
6916 | |
6917 *'taglength'* *'tl'* | |
6918 'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0) | |
6919 global | |
6920 If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters. | |
6921 | |
6922 *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'* | |
6923 'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
6924 global | |
6925 {not in Vi} | |
824 | 6926 If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that |
6927 tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is. | |
7 | 6928 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
6929 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
6930 | |
6931 *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433* | |
6932 'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with | |
6933 |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS") | |
6934 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
6935 Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To | |
6936 include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash | |
6937 (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes). | |
6938 When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path | |
6939 of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in | |
6940 'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see | |
6941 |tags-option|. | |
6942 "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in | |
2522
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
6943 a directory tree. See |file-searching|. E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
6944 find all files named "tags" below "/lib". The filename itself cannot |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
6945 contain wildcards, it is used as-is. E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
6946 files called "tags?". {not available when compiled without the |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
6947 |+path_extra| feature} |
515 | 6948 The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names |
6949 actually used. | |
7 | 6950 If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag |
6951 files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The | |
6952 default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case | |
6953 differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags| | |
6954 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
6955 file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
6956 uses another default. | |
6957 {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"} | |
6958 | |
6959 *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'* | |
6960 'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on) | |
6961 global | |
6962 {not in all versions of Vi} | |
6963 When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or | |
6964 ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the | |
6965 tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or | |
6966 any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified | |
6967 tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry. | |
6968 Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a | |
6969 mapping which should not change the tagstack. | |
6970 | |
6971 *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531* | |
6972 'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails: | |
6973 in the GUI: "builtin_gui" | |
6974 on Amiga: "amiga" | |
6975 on BeOS: "beos-ansi" | |
6976 on Mac: "mac-ansi" | |
6977 on MiNT: "vt52" | |
6978 on MS-DOS: "pcterm" | |
6979 on OS/2: "os2ansi" | |
6980 on Unix: "ansi" | |
6981 on VMS: "ansi" | |
6982 on Win 32: "win32") | |
6983 global | |
6984 Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control | |
6985 characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
6986 For example: > | |
6987 :set term=$TERM | |
6988 < See |termcap|. | |
6989 | |
6990 *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'* | |
6991 *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'* | |
6992 'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm") | |
6993 global | |
6994 {not in Vi} | |
6995 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
6996 feature} | |
6997 The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified | |
6998 by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping | |
6999 that some languages (such as Arabic) require. | |
7000 Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when | |
7001 'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored. | |
7002 Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that | |
7003 'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically. | |
7004 This option is reset when the GUI is started. | |
7005 For further details see |arabic.txt|. | |
7006 | |
7007 *'termencoding'* *'tenc'* | |
7008 'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ 2 GUI: "utf-8"; with | |
7009 Macintosh GUI: "macroman") | |
7010 global | |
7011 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
7012 feature} | |
7013 {not in Vi} | |
7014 Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character | |
7015 encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For | |
7016 the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the | |
1152 | 7017 display). Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then |
7018 'termencoding' should be "macroman". | |
7 | 7019 In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage |
7020 when it differs from the ANSI codepage. | |
7021 *E617* | |
7022 Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI. After the GUI has been | |
7023 successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8". | |
7024 Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error | |
7025 message is shown. | |
7026 For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters, | |
7027 because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters. | |
7028 When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option. | |
7029 This is the normal value. | |
7030 Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See | |
7031 |encoding-table|. | |
7032 The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or | |
7033 iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you | |
7034 will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters. | |
7035 Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and | |
7036 want to edit a UTF-8 file: > | |
7037 :let &termencoding = &encoding | |
7038 :set encoding=utf-8 | |
7039 < You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8. | |
7040 | |
7041 *'terse'* *'noterse'* | |
7042 'terse' boolean (default off) | |
7043 global | |
7044 When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message | |
7045 for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being | |
7046 displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi | |
7047 shortens a lot of messages} | |
7048 | |
7049 *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'* | |
7050 'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
7051 global | |
7052 {not in Vi} | |
7053 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'. | |
7054 For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is | |
7055 set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is | |
7056 reset, 'fileformats' is made empty. | |
7057 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
7058 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7059 | |
7060 *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'* | |
7061 'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on, | |
7062 others: default off) | |
7063 local to buffer | |
7064 {not in Vi} | |
7065 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'. | |
7066 For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is | |
7067 set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to | |
7068 "unix". | |
7069 | |
7070 *'textwidth'* *'tw'* | |
7071 'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0) | |
7072 local to buffer | |
7073 {not in Vi} | |
7074 Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be | |
7075 broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables | |
10 | 7076 this. 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. When |
7077 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also | |
7 | 7078 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. |
838 | 7079 When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line. |
7 | 7080 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
7081 | |
7082 *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'* | |
7083 'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "") | |
7084 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
7085 {not in Vi} | |
7086 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words | |
10 | 7087 for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. Each line in |
7 | 7088 the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by |
7089 non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line | |
7090 length is 510 bytes. | |
7091 To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at | |
7092 http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk . | |
10 | 7093 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces |
7 | 7094 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file |
7095 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. | |
7096 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
7097 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
7098 uses another default. | |
7099 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. | |
7100 | |
7101 *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'* | |
7102 'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off) | |
7103 global | |
7104 {not in Vi} | |
7105 When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator. | |
7106 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
7107 | |
7108 *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'* | |
7109 'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on) | |
7110 global | |
7111 *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'* | |
7112 'ttimeout' boolean (default off) | |
7113 global | |
7114 {not in Vi} | |
7115 These two options together determine the behavior when part of a | |
7116 mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received: | |
7117 | |
7118 'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~ | |
7119 off off do not time out | |
7120 on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes | |
7121 off on time out on key codes | |
7122 | |
7123 If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete | |
7124 mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there | |
7125 is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For | |
7126 example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next | |
7127 character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'. | |
7128 When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for | |
7129 the next character to arrive. After that the already received | |
7130 characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can | |
7131 be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option. | |
7132 On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause | |
7133 malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits | |
7134 forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start | |
7135 with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have | |
7136 problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key | |
7137 sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and | |
7138 reset the 'timeout' option. | |
7139 | |
7140 NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
7141 | |
7142 *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'* | |
7143 'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000) | |
7144 global | |
7145 {not in all versions of Vi} | |
7146 *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'* | |
7147 'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1) | |
7148 global | |
7149 {not in Vi} | |
7150 The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key | |
7151 sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G | |
7152 when part of a command has been typed. | |
7153 Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a | |
7154 different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to | |
7155 a non-negative number. | |
7156 | |
7157 ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~ | |
7158 < 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen' | |
7159 >= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen' | |
7160 | |
7161 The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options | |
7162 tell so. A useful setting would be > | |
7163 :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100 | |
7164 < (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after | |
7165 a tenth of a second). | |
7166 | |
7167 *'title'* *'notitle'* | |
7168 'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) | |
7169 global | |
7170 {not in Vi} | |
7171 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
7172 feature} | |
7173 When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of | |
7174 'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to: | |
7175 filename [+=-] (path) - VIM | |
7176 Where: | |
7177 filename the name of the file being edited | |
7178 - indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off | |
7179 + indicates the file was modified | |
7180 = indicates the file is read-only | |
7181 =+ indicates the file is read-only and modified | |
7182 (path) is the path of the file being edited | |
7183 - VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM" | |
7184 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles | |
7185 (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and | |
7186 terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and | |
7187 iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap). | |
7188 *X11* | |
7189 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will | |
7190 be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11" | |
7191 when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also | |
7192 works for the icon name |'icon'|. | |
7193 But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title | |
7194 will not work (except in the GUI). | |
7195 If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'. | |
7196 You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then. | |
7197 When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command: | |
7198 rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY & | |
7199 then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the | |
7200 title of the window should change back to what it should be after | |
7201 exiting Vim. | |
7202 | |
7203 *'titlelen'* | |
7204 'titlelen' number (default 85) | |
7205 global | |
7206 {not in Vi} | |
7207 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
7208 feature} | |
7209 Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window | |
10 | 7210 title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is |
7211 shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this. | |
7 | 7212 Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But |
7213 it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters | |
7214 available also depends on the font used and other things in the title | |
7215 bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise, | |
7216 values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used. | |
7217 'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option. | |
7218 | |
7219 *'titleold'* | |
7220 'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim") | |
7221 global | |
7222 {not in Vi} | |
7223 {only available when compiled with the |+title| | |
7224 feature} | |
7225 This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the | |
7226 original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or | |
7227 'titlestring' is not empty. | |
36 | 7228 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
7229 security reasons. | |
7 | 7230 *'titlestring'* |
7231 'titlestring' string (default "") | |
7232 global | |
7233 {not in Vi} | |
7234 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
7235 feature} | |
7236 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the | |
7237 window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on. | |
7238 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently | |
7239 Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a | |
7240 non-empty 't_ts' option). | |
7241 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will | |
7242 be restored if possible |X11|. | |
7243 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be | |
7244 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. | |
7245 Example: > | |
7246 :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p") | |
7247 :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70 | |
7248 < The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right | |
7249 of the available space. | |
7250 Some people prefer to have the file name first: > | |
7251 :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%) | |
7252 < Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file, | |
10 | 7253 without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a |
7 | 7254 separating space only when needed. |
7255 NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display | |
7256 to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character). | |
7257 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} | |
7258 | |
7259 *'toolbar'* *'tb'* | |
7260 'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips") | |
7261 global | |
7262 {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and | |
7263 |+GUI_Photon|} | |
10 | 7264 The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The |
7 | 7265 possible values are: |
7266 icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons. | |
7267 text Toolbar buttons shown with text. | |
7268 horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are | |
10 | 7269 horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI} |
7 | 7270 tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons. |
7271 Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse | |
7272 cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment. | |
7273 | |
7274 If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the | |
7275 following: > | |
7276 :set tb=icons,text | |
7277 < Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They | |
7278 will show icons if both are requested. | |
7279 | |
7280 If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if | |
7281 'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable | |
7282 the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: > | |
7283 :set guioptions-=T | |
7284 < Also see |gui-toolbar|. | |
7285 | |
7286 *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'* | |
7287 'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small") | |
7288 global | |
7289 {not in Vi} | |
7290 {only in the GTK+ 2 GUI} | |
7291 Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are: | |
7292 tiny Use tiny toolbar icons. | |
7293 small Use small toolbar icons (default). | |
7294 medium Use medium-sized toolbar icons. | |
7295 large Use large toolbar icons. | |
7296 The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on | |
7297 the current theme. Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24, | |
7298 small=20x20 and tiny=16x16. | |
7299 | |
7300 If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined | |
7301 by user preferences or the current theme is used. | |
7302 | |
7303 *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'* | |
7304 'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on) | |
7305 global | |
7306 {not in Vi} | |
7307 When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones. | |
7308 When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones. | |
7309 When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for | |
7310 the change to take effect, for example: > | |
7311 :set notbi term=$TERM | |
7312 < See also |termcap|. | |
7313 Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin | |
7314 termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty | |
7315 xterm entries...). | |
7316 | |
7317 *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'* | |
7318 'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm, | |
7319 sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or | |
7320 iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in | |
7321 a DOS console) | |
7322 global | |
7323 {not in Vi} | |
7324 Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to | |
7325 the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line | |
7326 commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple | |
7327 windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region. | |
7328 Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen | |
7329 line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the | |
7330 mouse in an xterm and other terminals. | |
7331 | |
7332 *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'* | |
7333 'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term') | |
7334 global | |
7335 {not in Vi} | |
7336 {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not | |
7337 available when compiled without |+mouse|} | |
7338 Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized. | |
1213 | 7339 Currently these strings are valid: |
7 | 7340 *xterm-mouse* |
7341 xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates | |
7342 "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes: | |
7343 "s" = button state | |
7344 "c" = column plus 33 | |
7345 "r" = row plus 33 | |
856 | 7346 This only works up to 223 columns! See "dec" for a |
189 | 7347 solution. |
7 | 7348 xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the |
7349 mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works | |
7350 much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at | |
180 | 7351 least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to |
7 | 7352 work. See below for how Vim detects this |
7353 automatically. | |
7354 *netterm-mouse* | |
7355 netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates | |
7356 "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers | |
7357 for the row and column. | |
7358 *dec-mouse* | |
7359 dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a | |
7360 rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[". | |
189 | 7361 This is also available for an Xterm, if it was |
7362 configured with "--enable-dec-locator". | |
7 | 7363 *jsbterm-mouse* |
7364 jsbterm JSB term mouse handling. | |
7365 *pterm-mouse* | |
7366 pterm QNX pterm mouse handling. | |
7367 | |
7368 The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm| | |
7369 |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|. | |
7370 Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always | |
7371 recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes | |
7372 are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not | |
7373 "xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict). | |
7374 This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is | |
7375 set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm" | |
7376 or "xterm2" already. The main use of this option is to set it to | |
7377 "xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can | |
7378 handle xterm mouse codes. | |
7379 The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be | |
1621 | 7380 95 or higher. This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse| |
7 | 7381 feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the |
7382 xterm version number. Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly. | |
7383 If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set | |
7384 t_RV to an empty string: > | |
7385 :set t_RV= | |
7386 < | |
7387 *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'* | |
7388 'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999) | |
7389 global | |
7390 Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines | |
7391 to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is | |
7392 very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number, | |
7393 e.g., 3, to speed up displaying. | |
7394 | |
7395 *'ttytype'* *'tty'* | |
7396 'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM) | |
7397 global | |
7398 Alias for 'term', see above. | |
7399 | |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7400 *'undodir'* *'udir'* |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7401 'undodir' 'udir' string (default ".") |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7402 global |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7403 {not in Vi} |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7404 {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature} |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7405 List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas. |
2220
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
7406 See |'backupdir'| for details of the format. |
2218
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
7407 "." means using the directory of the file. The undo file name for |
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
7408 "file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~". |
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
7409 For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited |
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
7410 file, with path separators replaced with "%". |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7411 When writing: The first directory that exists is used. "." always |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7412 works, no directories after "." will be used for writing. |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7413 When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file. The first |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7414 undo file that exists is used. When it cannot be read an error is |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7415 given, no further entry is used. |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7416 See |undo-persistence|. |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7417 |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7418 *'undofile'* *'udf'* |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7419 'undofile' 'udf' boolean (default off) |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7420 local to buffer |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7421 {not in Vi} |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7422 {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature} |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7423 When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7424 writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7425 file on buffer read. |
2220
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
7426 The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'. |
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
7427 For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|. |
2394
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7428 The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7429 before a reload to be saved for undo. |
2220
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
7430 WARNING: this is a very new feature. Use at your own risk! |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
7431 |
7 | 7432 *'undolevels'* *'ul'* |
7433 'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS, | |
7434 Win32 and OS/2) | |
7435 global | |
7436 {not in Vi} | |
7437 Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information | |
7438 is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used | |
7439 (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory). | |
7440 Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes | |
7441 itself: > | |
7442 set ul=0 | |
7443 < But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in | |
7444 'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo. | |
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2240
diff
changeset
|
7445 Also see |undo-two-ways|. |
7 | 7446 Set to a negative number for no undo at all: > |
7447 set ul=-1 | |
7448 < This helps when you run out of memory for a single change. | |
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2240
diff
changeset
|
7449 Also see |clear-undo|. |
7 | 7450 |
2394
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7451 *'undoreload'* *'ur'* |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7452 'undoreload' 'ur' number (default 10000) |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7453 global |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7454 {not in Vi} |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7455 Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it. This applies to the |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7456 ":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7457 Vim. |FileChangedShell| |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7458 The save only happens when this options is negative or when the number |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7459 of lines is smaller than the value of this option. |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7460 Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload. |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7461 |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7462 When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read. |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7463 |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7464 Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory. Set |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
7465 this option to a lower value if you run out of memory. |
7 | 7466 |
7467 *'updatecount'* *'uc'* | |
7468 'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200) | |
7469 global | |
7470 {not in Vi} | |
7471 After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to | |
7472 disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on | |
7473 recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting | |
7474 Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly | |
7475 mode this option will be initialized to 10000. | |
7476 The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|. | |
7477 When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are | |
7478 created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount' | |
7479 is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted. | |
7480 Also see |'swapsync'|. | |
7481 This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile" | |
7482 or "nowrite". | |
7483 | |
7484 *'updatetime'* *'ut'* | |
7485 'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000) | |
7486 global | |
7487 {not in Vi} | |
7488 If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be | |
7489 written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the | |
7490 |CursorHold| autocommand event. | |
7491 | |
7492 *'verbose'* *'vbs'* | |
7493 'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0) | |
7494 global | |
7495 {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean | |
7496 verbose option} | |
7497 When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing. | |
7498 Currently, these messages are given: | |
7499 >= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written. | |
7500 >= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed. | |
712 | 7501 >= 5 Every searched tags file and include file. |
7 | 7502 >= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed. |
7503 >= 9 Every executed autocommand. | |
7504 >= 12 Every executed function. | |
7505 >= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded. | |
7506 >= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause. | |
7507 >= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters). | |
7508 | |
7509 This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|. | |
7510 This option is also set by the |:verbose| command. | |
7511 | |
293 | 7512 When the 'verbosefile' option is set then the verbose messages are not |
7513 displayed. | |
7514 | |
7515 *'verbosefile'* *'vfile'* | |
7516 'verbosefile' 'vfile' string (default empty) | |
7517 global | |
7518 {not in Vi} | |
7519 When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name. | |
7520 When the file exists messages are appended. | |
7521 Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made | |
2265
b7cb69ab616d
Added salt to blowfish encryption.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2250
diff
changeset
|
7522 empty. Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time. |
293 | 7523 Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first. |
7524 The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not | |
7525 displayed when 'verbosefile' is set. | |
7526 | |
7 | 7527 *'viewdir'* *'vdir'* |
7528 'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32: | |
7529 "$VIM/vimfiles/view", | |
7530 for Unix: "~/.vim/view", | |
7531 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view" | |
7532 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view" | |
7533 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view") | |
7534 global | |
7535 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7536 {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| |
7 | 7537 feature} |
7538 Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|. | |
7539 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
7540 security reasons. | |
7541 | |
7542 *'viewoptions'* *'vop'* | |
7543 'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor") | |
7544 global | |
7545 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7546 {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| |
7 | 7547 feature} |
7548 Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated | |
10 | 7549 list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something: |
7 | 7550 word save and restore ~ |
7551 cursor cursor position in file and in window | |
7552 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local | |
7553 fold options | |
7554 options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not | |
7555 global values for local options) | |
7556 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward | |
7557 slashes | |
7558 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when | |
7559 on Windows or DOS | |
7560 | |
7561 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files | |
7562 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, | |
7563 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. | |
7564 | |
7565 *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528* | |
7566 'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS, | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7567 Windows and OS/2: '100,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:, |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7568 for Amiga: '100,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2: |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7569 for others: '100,<50,s10,h) |
7 | 7570 global |
7571 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7572 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo| |
7 | 7573 feature} |
7574 When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written | |
10 | 7575 when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). The string should be a comma |
7 | 7576 separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character |
7577 identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string | |
7578 which specifies the value of that parameter. If a particular | |
7579 character is left out, then the default value is used for that | |
7580 parameter. The following is a list of the identifying characters and | |
7581 the effect of their value. | |
7582 CHAR VALUE ~ | |
7583 ! When included, save and restore global variables that start | |
7584 with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase | |
7585 letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis" | |
2607 | 7586 and "_K_L_M" are not. Nested List and Dict items may not be |
2642 | 7587 read back correctly, you end up with an empty item. |
7 | 7588 " Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of |
7589 the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a | |
7590 backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the | |
7591 start of a comment! | |
7592 % When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is | |
7593 started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not | |
7594 restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the | |
10 | 7595 buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Buffers |
7 | 7596 without a file name and buffers for help files are not written |
7597 to the viminfo file. | |
23 | 7598 When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum |
7599 number of buffers that are stored. Without a number all | |
7600 buffers are stored. | |
7 | 7601 ' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks |
7602 are remembered. This parameter must always be included when | |
7603 'viminfo' is non-empty. | |
7604 Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the | |
7605 |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file. | |
7606 / Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be | |
10 | 7607 saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute |
7 | 7608 patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of |
7609 'history' is used. | |
7610 : Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be | |
10 | 7611 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. |
7 | 7612 < Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then |
7613 registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are | |
7614 saved. '"' is the old name for this item. | |
7615 Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte. | |
7616 @ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be | |
10 | 7617 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. |
7 | 7618 c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the |
7619 'encoding' used when writing the file to the current | |
233 | 7620 'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|. |
7 | 7621 f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0 |
7622 to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when | |
10 | 7623 non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current |
7 | 7624 cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo"). |
7625 h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo | |
7626 file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch" | |
7627 has been used since the last search command. | |
7628 n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow | |
7629 the 'n'. Must be the last one! If the "-i" argument was | |
7630 given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one | |
7631 given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are expanded | |
7632 when opening the file, not when setting the option. | |
7633 r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next | |
7634 ','). This parameter can be given several times. Each | |
7635 specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be | |
7636 stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you | |
7637 could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can | |
7638 also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is | |
7639 ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50 | |
7640 characters. | |
7641 s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are | |
7642 not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default | |
7643 "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text. | |
7644 Also see the '<' item above: line count limit. | |
7645 | |
7646 Example: > | |
7647 :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo | |
7648 < | |
7649 '50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you | |
7650 edited. | |
7651 <1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be | |
7652 remembered. | |
7653 s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped. | |
7654 :0 Command-line history will not be saved. | |
7655 n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo". | |
7656 no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used, | |
7657 that is, save all of the search history, and also the | |
7658 previous search and substitute patterns. | |
7659 no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back. | |
7660 no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored. | |
7661 | |
7662 When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to | |
7663 load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically. | |
7664 | |
7665 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
7666 security reasons. | |
7667 | |
7668 *'virtualedit'* *'ve'* | |
7669 'virtualedit' 've' string (default "") | |
7670 global | |
7671 {not in Vi} | |
7672 {not available when compiled without the | |
7673 |+virtualedit| feature} | |
7674 A comma separated list of these words: | |
7675 block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode. | |
7676 insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode. | |
7677 all Allow virtual editing in all modes. | |
772 | 7678 onemore Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line |
782 | 7679 |
7 | 7680 Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is |
1263 | 7681 no actual character. This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end |
7 | 7682 of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and |
7683 editing a table. | |
772 | 7684 "onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just |
7685 after the last character of the line. This makes some commands more | |
7686 consistent. Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line | |
7687 if the line was empty. But it is far from Vi compatible. It may also | |
782 | 7688 break some plugins or Vim scripts. For example because |l| can move |
7689 the cursor after the last character. Use with care! | |
7690 Using the |$| command will move to the last character in the line, not | |
7691 past it. This may actually move the cursor to the left! | |
772 | 7692 It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will |
7693 not get a warning for it. | |
7 | 7694 |
7695 *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep* | |
7696 'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off) | |
7697 global | |
7698 {not in Vi} | |
7699 Use visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the | |
7700 visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted, | |
7701 use ":set vb t_vb=". | |
7702 Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You | |
7703 might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|. | |
7704 In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display | |
7705 for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f", | |
7706 where 40 is the time in msec. | |
7707 Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash. | |
7708 Also see 'errorbells'. | |
7709 | |
7710 *'warn'* *'nowarn'* | |
7711 'warn' boolean (default on) | |
7712 global | |
7713 Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer | |
7714 has been changed. | |
7715 | |
7716 *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'* | |
7717 'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off) | |
7718 global | |
7719 {not in Vi} | |
667 | 7720 This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' terminal option. |
7 | 7721 It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x. |
7722 Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and | |
7723 vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running. | |
7724 | |
7725 *'whichwrap'* *'ww'* | |
7726 'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "") | |
7727 global | |
7728 {not in Vi} | |
7729 Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the | |
7730 previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in | |
7731 the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys: | |
7732 char key mode ~ | |
7733 b <BS> Normal and Visual | |
7734 s <Space> Normal and Visual | |
712 | 7735 h "h" Normal and Visual (not recommended) |
7736 l "l" Normal and Visual (not recommended) | |
7 | 7737 < <Left> Normal and Visual |
7738 > <Right> Normal and Visual | |
7739 ~ "~" Normal | |
7740 [ <Left> Insert and Replace | |
7741 ] <Right> Insert and Replace | |
7742 For example: > | |
7743 :set ww=<,>,[,] | |
7744 < allows wrap only when cursor keys are used. | |
7745 When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change | |
7746 operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h" | |
7747 different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This | |
7748 is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and | |
7749 "dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping | |
7750 ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the | |
7751 cursor. | |
714 | 7752 When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a |
7753 line then it will not move to the next line. This makes "dl", "cl", | |
7754 "yl" etc. work normally. | |
7 | 7755 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
7756 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7757 | |
7758 *'wildchar'* *'wc'* | |
7759 'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E) | |
7760 global | |
7761 {not in Vi} | |
7762 Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the | |
7763 command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'. | |
1621 | 7764 More info here: |cmdline-completion|. |
7 | 7765 The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See |
7766 'wildcharm' for that. | |
7767 Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: > | |
7768 :set wc=<Esc> | |
7769 < NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
7770 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7771 | |
7772 *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'* | |
7773 'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0)) | |
7774 global | |
7775 {not in Vi} | |
7776 'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is | |
233 | 7777 recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line |
7778 keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally | |
7 | 7779 you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that |
7780 automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: > | |
7781 :set wcm=<C-Z> | |
1621 | 7782 :cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z> |
7 | 7783 < Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N. |
7784 | |
7785 *'wildignore'* *'wig'* | |
7786 'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "") | |
7787 global | |
7788 {not in Vi} | |
7789 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
7790 feature} | |
7791 A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these | |
1754 | 7792 patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names, and |
7793 influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and |globpath()| unless | |
7794 a flag is passed to disable this. | |
7 | 7795 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. |
7796 Also see 'suffixes'. | |
7797 Example: > | |
7798 :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj | |
7799 < The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
7800 a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
7801 uses another default. | |
7802 | |
2652 | 7803 |
2662 | 7804 *'wildignorecase'* *'wic'* *'nowildignorecase'* *'nowic'* |
2652 | 7805 'wildignorecase' 'wic' boolean (default off) |
7806 global | |
7807 {not in Vi} | |
7808 When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories. | |
7809 Has no effect on systems where file name case is generally ignored. | |
7810 Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which | |
7811 happens when there are special characters. | |
7812 | |
7813 | |
7 | 7814 *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'* |
7815 'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off) | |
7816 global | |
7817 {not in Vi} | |
7818 {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu| | |
7819 feature} | |
7820 When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced | |
7821 mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion, | |
7822 the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the | |
7823 first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is | |
7824 one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or | |
7825 CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match. | |
7826 When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is | |
7827 specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode. | |
7828 If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on | |
7829 the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls | |
7830 as needed. | |
7831 The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used | |
7832 for selecting a completion. | |
7833 While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special | |
7834 meanings: | |
7835 | |
7836 <Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N) | |
7837 <Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a | |
7838 subdirectory or submenu. | |
7839 <CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a | |
7840 dot: move into a submenu. | |
7841 <Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into | |
7842 parent directory or parent menu. | |
7843 | |
7844 This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|. | |
7845 | |
7846 If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead | |
7847 of selecting a different match, use this: > | |
7848 :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left> | |
7849 :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right> | |
7850 < | |
7851 The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match | |
7852 |hl-WildMenu|. | |
7853 | |
7854 *'wildmode'* *'wim'* | |
7855 'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full") | |
7856 global | |
7857 {not in Vi} | |
7858 Completion mode that is used for the character specified with | |
10 | 7859 'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each |
1152 | 7860 part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar'. The |
7 | 7861 first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar', |
7862 The second part for the second use, etc. | |
7863 These are the possible values for each part: | |
7864 "" Complete only the first match. | |
7865 "full" Complete the next full match. After the last match, | |
7866 the original string is used and then the first match | |
7867 again. | |
7868 "longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't | |
7869 result in a longer string, use the next part. | |
7870 "longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is | |
7871 enabled. | |
7872 "list" When more than one match, list all matches. | |
7873 "list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and | |
7874 complete first match. | |
7875 "list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and | |
7876 complete till longest common string. | |
7877 When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases. | |
7878 | |
7879 Examples: > | |
7880 :set wildmode=full | |
233 | 7881 < Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) > |
7 | 7882 :set wildmode=longest,full |
7883 < Complete longest common string, then each full match > | |
7884 :set wildmode=list:full | |
7885 < List all matches and complete each full match > | |
7886 :set wildmode=list,full | |
7887 < List all matches without completing, then each full match > | |
7888 :set wildmode=longest,list | |
7889 < Complete longest common string, then list alternatives. | |
1621 | 7890 More info here: |cmdline-completion|. |
7 | 7891 |
40 | 7892 *'wildoptions'* *'wop'* |
7893 'wildoptions' 'wop' string (default "") | |
7894 global | |
7895 {not in Vi} | |
7896 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
7897 feature} | |
7898 A list of words that change how command line completion is done. | |
7899 Currently only one word is allowed: | |
7900 tagfile When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of | |
856 | 7901 tag and the file of the tag is listed. Only one match |
40 | 7902 is displayed per line. Often used tag kinds are: |
7903 d #define | |
7904 f function | |
7905 Also see |cmdline-completion|. | |
7906 | |
7 | 7907 *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'* |
7908 'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu") | |
7909 global | |
7910 {not in Vi} | |
7911 {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI} | |
7912 Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT | |
7913 key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the | |
7914 menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and | |
7915 entering special characters. This option tells what to do: | |
7916 no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be | |
7917 mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be | |
7918 done with the |:simalt| command. | |
7919 yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key | |
7920 combinations cannot be mapped. | |
7921 menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu | |
10 | 7922 shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other |
7 | 7923 keys can be mapped. |
7924 If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT | |
7925 key is never used for the menu. | |
36 | 7926 This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will |
7927 select the menu, unless it has been mapped. | |
7 | 7928 |
164 | 7929 *'window'* *'wi'* |
7930 'window' 'wi' number (default screen height - 1) | |
7931 global | |
7932 Window height. Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window, | |
7933 use 'lines' for that. | |
179 | 7934 Used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one window and the |
7935 value is smaller than 'lines' minus one. The screen will scroll | |
7936 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one. | |
164 | 7937 When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll |
7938 in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines. | |
7939 When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than | |
7940 or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1. | |
7941 {Vi also uses the option to specify the number of displayed lines} | |
7942 | |
7 | 7943 *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591* |
7944 'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1) | |
7945 global | |
7946 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7947 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 7948 feature} |
7949 Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard | |
10 | 7950 minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the |
1621 | 7951 focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the |
7952 cost of the height of other windows. | |
7953 Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing. | |
7954 Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen. | |
7955 Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high. This has the drawback | |
7956 that ":all" will create only two windows. To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4" | |
7957 to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done, | |
7958 using the |VimEnter| event: > | |
7959 au VimEnter * set winheight=999 | |
7960 < Minimum value is 1. | |
7961 The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the | |
7 | 7962 height of the current window. |
7963 'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set | |
7964 the minimal height for other windows. | |
7965 | |
7966 *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'* | |
7967 'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off) | |
7968 local to window | |
7969 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7970 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 7971 feature} |
7972 Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and | |
1152 | 7973 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. Set by default for the |
7974 |preview-window| and |quickfix-window|. | |
7 | 7975 The height may be changed anyway when running out of room. |
7976 | |
782 | 7977 *'winfixwidth'* *'wfw'* *'nowinfixwidth'* *'nowfw'* |
7978 'winfixwidth' 'wfw' boolean (default off) | |
7979 local to window | |
7980 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7981 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
782 | 7982 feature} |
7983 Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and | |
1152 | 7984 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. |
782 | 7985 The width may be changed anyway when running out of room. |
7986 | |
7 | 7987 *'winminheight'* *'wmh'* |
7988 'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1) | |
7989 global | |
7990 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7991 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 7992 feature} |
7993 The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window. | |
7994 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. | |
7995 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a | |
7996 status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when | |
7997 they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.) | |
7998 Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window. | |
7999 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a | |
8000 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few | |
8001 windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable. | |
8002 | |
8003 *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'* | |
8004 'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1) | |
8005 global | |
8006 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8007 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 8008 feature} |
8009 The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window. | |
8010 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. | |
8011 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just | |
8012 a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one | |
8013 line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere | |
8014 to go.) | |
8015 Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window. | |
8016 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a | |
8017 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few | |
8018 windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable. | |
8019 | |
8020 *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592* | |
8021 'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20) | |
8022 global | |
8023 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8024 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 8025 feature} |
8026 Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard | |
8027 minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If | |
8028 the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of | |
8029 the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window | |
8030 always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing. | |
8031 The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the | |
8032 width of the current window. | |
8033 'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set | |
8034 the minimal width for other windows. | |
8035 | |
8036 *'wrap'* *'nowrap'* | |
8037 'wrap' boolean (default on) | |
8038 local to window | |
8039 {not in Vi} | |
8040 This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text | |
8041 in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that. | |
8042 When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and | |
10 | 8043 displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap |
8044 and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is | |
7 | 8045 moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll |
8046 horizontally. | |
8047 The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See | |
8048 'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary. | |
8049 To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: > | |
8050 :set sidescroll=5 | |
8051 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:> | |
8052 < See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
8053 This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
8054 on. |
7 | 8055 |
8056 *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'* | |
8057 'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0) | |
8058 local to buffer | |
8059 Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping | |
8060 starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted | |
8061 and inserting continues on the next line. | |
8062 Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause | |
8063 the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible. | |
8064 When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used. | |
8065 See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently | |
8066 and less usefully} | |
8067 | |
8068 *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'* | |
8069 'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385* | |
8070 global | |
500 | 8071 Searches wrap around the end of the file. Also applies to |]s| and |
8072 |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes. | |
7 | 8073 |
8074 *'write'* *'nowrite'* | |
8075 'write' boolean (default on) | |
8076 global | |
8077 {not in Vi} | |
8078 Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed. | |
8079 Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are | |
10 | 8080 still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line |
7 | 8081 argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires |
8082 writing a temporary file. | |
8083 | |
8084 *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'* | |
8085 'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off) | |
8086 global | |
8087 Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override. | |
8088 | |
8089 *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'* | |
8090 'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off | |
8091 otherwise) | |
8092 global | |
8093 {not in Vi} | |
8094 Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after | |
8095 the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is | |
8096 also on. Reset this option if your file system is almost full. See | |
8097 |backup-table| for another explanation. | |
8098 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. | |
8099 NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is | |
8100 set. | |
8101 | |
8102 *'writedelay'* *'wd'* | |
8103 'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0) | |
8104 global | |
8105 {not in Vi} | |
8106 The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the | |
8107 screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by | |
8108 one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes. | |
8109 | |
8110 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: |